X1 With IDrive As of 7 12

Contents Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate Driving

Machine
THE BMW X1.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

X1 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/12, 07 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic Entertainment
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 160 Tone
page 276. 162 Radio
170 CD/multimedia
6 Notes Communication
192 Telephone
At a glance
204 Office
12 Cockpit
213 Contacts
18 iDrive
215 ConnectedDrive
25 Voice activation system
Mobility
Controls
224 Refueling
30 Opening and closing
226 Fuel
43 Adjusting
228 Wheels and tires
50 Transporting children safely
238 Engine compartment
54 Driving
243 Maintenance
68 Displays
245 Replacing components
80 Lamps
253 Breakdown assistance
85 Safety
259 Care
94 Driving stability control systems
98 Driving comfort Reference
105 Climate 266 Technical data
110 Interior equipment 268 Short commands for voice activation
120 Storage compartments system
276 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
126 Things to remember when driving
130 Loading
133 Saving fuel
Navigation
138 Navigation system
140 Destination entry
149 Destination guidance
157 What to do if...

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se
The fastest way to find information on a partic lected special equipment or country version, for
ular topic is by using the index. example.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in This also applies to safety-related functions and
the first chapter. systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Additional sources of information
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple
Should you have any questions, your service mentary Owner's Manuals.
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is arranged differently than shown in the illustra
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com tions.
Symbols Status of this Owner's Manual

Indicates precautions that must be followed at time of printing
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
icy of constant development that is conceived
Marks the end of a specific item of informa to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
tion. the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se cases, therefore, the features described in this
lect individual functions. Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac vehicle.
tivation system.
Updates made after the editorial
... Identifies the answers generated by the
deadline
voice activation system.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
Refers to measures that can be taken to help the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen
protect the environment. dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the rele For your own safety
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor
mation on a particular part or assembly. Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re
Vehicle equipment quires suitable maintenance and repair meth
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all ods.
series equipment, as well as country-specific Therefore, have this work performed only by a
and special equipment offered in the model ser BMW center or a workshop that works accord
ies.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de
6
Notes
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri California Proposition 65 Warning

ately trained personnel. California laws require us to state the following
If this work is not carried out properly, there is warning:
the danger of subsequent damage and related Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
safety hazards. components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con
Parts and accessories tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
chase accessories tested and approved by contained in vehicles and certain products of
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane component wear contain or emit chemicals
ously acquire the assurance that they have been known to the State of California to cause cancer
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
performance when installed on your vehicle. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
accept any liability for damage resulting from in chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
stallation of parts and accessories not approved animals. Always protect your skin by washing
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made thoroughly with soap and water.
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the Service and warranty
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine We recommend that you read this publication
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes lowing warranties:
sional advice on using these items, are available New Vehicle Limited Warranty
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
wheels, suspension components, brake dust Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
shields, telephones, including operation of any California Emission Control System Limited
mobile phone from within the vehicle without Warranty
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- Detailed information about these warranties is
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may listed in the Service and Warranty Information
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
electrical system or affect the validity of the Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center designed to meet the particular operating con
for additional information. Maintenance, re ditions and homologation requirements in your
placement, or repair of the emission control de country and continental region in order to deliver
vices and systems may be performed by any au the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op
tomotive repair establishment or individual erated under those conditions. If you wish to op
using any certified automotive part. erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
7
Notes
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita Ambient conditions, such as the tempera
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In ture.
such case, please contact Customer Relations These data are of a technical nature only and are
for further information. used to detect and eliminate faults and to opti
mize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes
Maintenance driven with the vehicle cannot be created from
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road these data. If services are used, for instance in
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi the event of repairs, service processes, warranty
cle Limited Warranty. cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical in
Specifications for required maintenance meas formation can be read out from the event and
ures: fault data memories by service personnel, in
cluding the manufacturer, using special diagno
BMW Maintenance system
sis tools. This service personnel can provide you
Service and Warranty Information Booklet with more information if needed. After trouble
for US models shooting, the information in the fault memory is
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for cleared or overwritten continuously.
Canadian models Situations are conceivable during the use of the
If the vehicle is not maintained according to vehicle in which these technical data could be
these specifications, this could result in serious come associated with a specific person in com
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov bination with other information, such as an ac
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness
ranty. accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of
an authorized expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
Data memory agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo
calization in the event of an emergency, permit
Numerous electronic components in your vehi
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the ve
cle contain data memories that store technical
hicle.
information on the vehicle condition, events and
faults, either temporarily or permanently. This
technical information generally documents the
state of a component, a module, a system or the Reporting safety defects
environment.
For US customers
Operating conditions of system compo
nents, such as filling levels. The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
Status messages from the vehicle and its
individual components, such as wheel rpm/ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
speed, motion delay, transverse accelera which could cause a crash or could cause injury
tion. or death, you should immediately inform the Na
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
Malfunctions and defects in important sys NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
tem components, such as lights and brakes. America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Vehicle responses to special driving situa Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the 1-800-831-1117.
stability control systems. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
8
Notes
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
9
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch for rear power win Automatic headlamp con

dows41 trol81
2 Power windows40 Adaptive light control81
3 Exterior mirror operation48 High-beam Assistant82
4 Lamps Front fog lamps83
Parking lamps80
5 Steering column stalk, left

Low beams80 Turn signal59
High beams, head

lamp flasher82
12
Cockpit At a glance
High-beam Assistant82 Change the radio station

Stopping a traffic announcement
Roadside parking lamps82 Select a music track
Scroll through the redial list
Computer70 Next entertainment source
Settings and information about Recirculated air mode107

the vehicle71
Instrument lighting83
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off54
6 Steering wheel buttons, left
11 Steering column stalk, right
Telephone192
Windshield wipers59
Volume
Rain sensor60
Activate/deactivate the voice acti

Rear window wiper61
vation system25
7 Shift paddles64
12 Ignition lock54
8 Instrument cluster14
13 Steering wheel heating49
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
14 Horn, the entire surface

15 Adjust the steering wheel49
16 Cruise control98
17 Opening tailgate35
18 Releasing the hood238
13
At a glance Cockpit
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer Hill Descent Control96

2 Indicator/warning lamps15 Computer70
3 Tachometer69 Date of next scheduled service, and re
4 Current fuel consumption69 maining distance to be driven75
Engine oil temperature69 Odometer and trip odometer68
5 Display for Checking engine oil level239
Clock68 Settings and information71
External temperature68 Check Control message

present77
Indicator/warning lamps15
7 Fuel gauge69
Cruise control98
8 Resetting the trip odometer68
6 Display for
Automatic transmission position62
14
Cockpit At a glance
Indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system
Front fog lamps, refer to page 83

The concept
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul
sive forces in order to maintain driv
ing stability, refer to page 94
The handbrake is set, refer to

page 58
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in Canada: the parking brake is set, re
a variety of combinations and colors. fer to page 58.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper

Engine malfunction with adverse ef
functioning when the engine is started or the ig
fect on emissions, refer to
nition is switched on, and light up briefly.
page 244
Canada: engine malfunction with ad

Text messages
verse effect on exhaust emissions,
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control refer to page 244
Display explain the meaning of the displayed in
dicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages

You can call up more information, e.g., on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages

The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Turn signals, refer to page 59
High beams/headlamp flasher, refer

to page 82
15
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner17 8 PDC Park Distance Control100

2 Control Display18 Backup camera102
3 Air vent108 HDC Hill Descent Control96
4 Hazard warning system253
Deactivate the Automatic Engine

Central locking system34 Start/Stop Function56
DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol94
5 Automatic climate control105
DTC Dynamic Traction Con
6 Glove compartment120
trol95
7 Radio and CD/DVD drive162
ECO PRO134
Programmable memory buttons23
9 Selector lever with automatic transmis

sion62
10 Controller with buttons18
16
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Emergency Request253 4 Reading lamps84
2 Panoramic glass sunroof41 5 Interior lamps84
3 Indicator lamp for the front pas

senger airbags87
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
This chapter describes all series equipment as
menu items and create the settings.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in Control Display
special equipment or the country version. This Notes
also applies to safety-related functions and sys To clean the Control Display, follow the care
tems. instructions, refer to page 262.
Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
The concept be damaged.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper Switching off
ated from a central location.
1. Press the button.
Using the iDrive during a trip
2. "Switch off control display"
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf
fic and road conditions allow this.
Controls at a glance
Controls
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
18
iDrive At a glance
Controller Press the button Function

Select menu items and create settings.
NAV Opens the Navigation
1. Turn. menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone

menu.
BACK Displays the previous

panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
3. Move in four directions.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
19
At a glance iDrive
Selecting menu items

Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate

that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
2. Press the controller. the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
Move the controller to the left repeatedly
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be until the first panel is displayed.
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings". Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Changing between panels
Opening the Options menu
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Press the button.
Move the controller to the left.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
Additional options: move the controller to the

right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".
20
iDrive At a glance
Control options for the selected main menu, Example: setting the clock
e.g., for "Radio".
If applicable, further operating options for Setting the clock
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station". 1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
Changing settings 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high
1. Select a field. lighted, and then press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

to display "Time/Date".
3. Press the controller. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high
lighted, and then press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check
box. It indicates whether the function is acti
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high

lighted, and then press the controller.
21
At a glance iDrive
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

press the controller.
Roaming is active.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Text message, e-mail was received.
Check the SIM card.

Status information SIM card is blocked.
Status field SIM card is missing.

The following information is displayed in the sta Enter the PIN.
tus field at the top right:
Time. Entertainment symbols
Current entertainment source.
Sound output, on/off. Symbol Meaning
Wireless network reception strength. CD/DVD player.
Telephone status.
Music collection.
Traffic bulletin reception.
Gracenote database.
Status field symbols AUX-IN port.
The symbols are grouped into various catego
ries. USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.

Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Additional symbols
HD Radio is switched on. Symbol Meaning

Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi

Telephone symbols tion.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call. Split screen

Missed call.
General information
Wireless network reception strength Additional information can be displayed on the
Symbol flashes: searching for net right side of the split screen, e.g., information
work. from the computer.
Wireless network is not available. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Bluetooth is switched on. when you change to another menu.
22
iDrive At a glance
Switching the split screen on and off Running a function

Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
2. "Split screen"
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Selecting the display
1. Press the button. Displaying the button assignment

2. "Split screen" Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
To display short information: touch the but

ton.
To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Programmable memory
buttons
Entering letters and numbers
General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro bers.
grammable memory buttons and called up di
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina
needed.
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
The settings are stored for the remote control

Symbol Function
currently in use.
Press the controller: delete the letter
Saving a function or number.
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
2. Press the desired button for more
than two seconds. Enter a blank space.
23
At a glance iDrive
Switching between letters and

numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower

case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let
ters.
Symbol Function
Move the controller forward:

switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the controller forward:

switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
Only those letters are offered during the en
try for which data is available.
Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail
able on the Control Display.
24
Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
describes equipment that may not be found in
wheel.
special equipment or the country version. This 2. Wait for the signal.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys 3. Say the command.
tems. The command appears on the Control Dis
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indicates
The concept that the voice activation system is active.
Most functions that are displayed on the If no other commands are available, operate the
Control Display can be operated with the function via iDrive in this case.
voice activation system using spoken com
mands. The system prompts you to make Terminating the voice activation
your entries. system
Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us Briefly press the button on the steering
ing the voice activation system. wheel or Cancel.
The system uses a special microphone lo
cated in the area of the interior rearview mir
ror. Possible commands
... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Most menu items on the Control Display can be
Manual to use with the voice activation sys voiced as commands.
tem. The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis
play.
Requirements The functions of the main menu have short com
Via the Control Display, set a language that is mands.
also supported by the voice activation system Some list items, such as the phone book entries,
so that the spoken commands can be identified. can also be selected via the voice activation sys
Set the language, refer to page 74. tem. Say the list items exactly as they are dis
played on the list.
Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the system read possible com
mands aloud: Voice commands.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, On the Control Display:

the commands for the settings are read out loud.
1. "Settings"
Executing functions using short 2. "Language/Units"
commands 3. "Speech mode:"
Functions on the main menu can be performed 4. Select the setting.
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently se
lected, for instance Vehicle status.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 268.
Help dialog for the voice activation

system
Calling up help dialog: Help
Additional commands for the help dialog:
Help with examples: information about the
current operating options and the most im Adjusting the volume
portant commands for them are announced. Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
Help with voice activation: information until the desired volume is set.
about the principle of operation for the voice The volume remains constant even if the
activation system is announced. volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Example: playing back a CD
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary. Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
wheel.
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
3. C D and multimedia the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
The medium last played is played back. unnecessarily delay the establishment of a te
lephone connection.
4. C D track ... e.g., CD track 4.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the Environmental conditions
standard dialog or a shorter version.
Say the commands, numbers, and letters
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an
smoothly and with normal volume, empha
nouncements from the system are issued in an
sis, and speed.
abbreviated form.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Always say commands in the language of

the voice activation system.
Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
27
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
This chapter describes all series equipment as control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
well as country-specific and special equipment Personal Profile.
In addition, information about service require
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 243.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys
Integrated key
tems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:

Driver's door, refer to page 34.
New remote controls

1 Unlocking
You can obtain new remote controls from your
2 Locking service center.
3 Opening tailgate
Loss of the remote controls
General information Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls service center.
with keys.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
Personal Profile
is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven.
The concept
Use each remote control at least twice a year for
longer road trips in order to maintain the batter You can set several of your vehicle's functions
ies' charge status. to suit your personal needs and preferences.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the The settings are automatically saved in the
remote control contains a replaceable battery, profile currently activated in the remote con
refer to page 38. trol.
30
Opening and closing Controls
The remote control used is detected when Type of display, refer to page 104.
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile Light settings:
is called up.
Triple turn signal activation, refer to
Your personal settings will be recognized page 59.
and called up again even if the vehicle has
Welcome lamps, refer to page 80.
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control. Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 81.
The individual settings are stored for a maximum
of four remote controls. They are stored for two Daytime running lights, refer to
remote controls if Comfort Access is in use. page 81.
High-beam Assistant, refer to
Personal Profile settings page 82.
The following functions and settings can be Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
stored in a profile. cooling function and automatic recirculated
More information on the settings can be found air control activated/deactivated, tempera
under: ture, air flow rate and distribution, refer to
page 105.
Assigning the programmable memory but
tons, refer to page 23. Navigation:
Response of the central locking system Voice activation, refer to page 151.
when the car is being unlocked, refer to Route criteria, refer to page 149.
page 32. Map view settings, refer to page 152.
Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to Entertainment:
page 35.
Tone control, refer to page 160.
Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi
tion after unlocking, refer to page 33. Radio, stored stations, refer to
page 168.
Settings for the display on the Control Dis
play and in the instrument cluster: CD/multimedia, audio source listened to
last, refer to page 170.
12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 73. Telephone: volume, refer to page 196.
Date format, refer to page 74.

Brightness of the Control Display, refer Central locking system
to page 75.
Language on the Control Display, refer The concept
to page 74. The central locking system becomes active
Units of measure for fuel consumption, when the driver's door is closed.
distance covered/remaining distances, The system simultaneously engages and re
and temperature, refer to page 72. leases the locks on the following:
Show visual warning for the Park Distance Doors.
Control PDC, refer to page 101.
Tailgate.
Backup camera:
Fuel filler flap.
Function selection, refer to page 102.
31
Operating from the outside You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Via the remote control. The setting is stored for the remote control cur
Via the door lock. rently in use.
In cars with Comfort Access, via the door 1. "Settings"

handles on the driver's and front passenger 2. "Door locks"
sides.
3. "Unlock button:"
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re
fer to page 39.
Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system, re 4. Select the desired function:
fer to page 35.
"All doors"
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked. The entire vehicle is unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the "Driver's door only"

central locking system unlocks automatically. Only the driver's door and the fuel
The hazard warning system and interior lamps filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
come on. unlocks the entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Opening and closing: from the Press and hold the button on the remote
outside control.
The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof
Using the remote control open.
General information Locking

Take the remote control with you Press the button on the remote control.
People or animals left unattended in a Locking from the outside
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
side. Always take the remote control with you there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can unlocked from inside without special knowl
then be opened from the outside. edge.
Unlocking Switching on the interior lamps and

Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked. courtesy lamps
The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour Press the button on the remote control
tesy lamps are switched on. with the vehicle locked.
32
Panic mode When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po

You can trigger the alarm system if you find sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
yourself in a dangerous situation. is activated.
Press the button on the remote control for at Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
least 3 seconds. If this function is used, first make sure that
To switch off the alarm: press any button. the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
Unlocking tailgate damage to objects behind the seat as a result of
a rearward movement of the seat.
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second and release. The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of When a seat position switch is pressed.
whether it was previously locked or unlocked. When a button of the seat and mirror mem
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. ory is pressed.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be
fore opening. Selecting automatic activation
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do 1. "Settings"
not place the remote control into the cargo area. 2. "Door locks"
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is 3. "Last seat position auto."
pushed closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate
has not been inadvertently unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote
control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
In vehicles without an alarm system or Comfort
Access, only the driver's door can be unlocked
and locked using the integrated key in the door
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings lock.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
used last are stored for the remote control cur control, the battery in the remote control is dis
rently in use. charged. Use the remote control during an ex
tended drive in order to recharge the battery,
refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort
33
Access contains a battery that may need to be In some market-specific versions, the alarm sys
replaced, refer to page 38. tem, refer to page 38, is triggered if the vehicle
is unlocked via the door lock.
For US owners only To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
The transmitter and receiver units comply with remote control or insert the remote control into
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication the ignition lock all the way.
Commission regulations. Operation is governed In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
by the following: driver's door can be locked via the door lock.
FCC ID:
LX8766S Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap,
and the tailgate all at once
LX8766E
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail
LX8CAS
gate at once:
Compliance statement:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
the button for the central locking system in
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
the interior, refer to page 34.
conditions:
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas
This device may not cause harmful interfer
senger door, refer to page 35.
ence, and
3. Lock the vehicle.
this device must accept any interference re
ceived, including interference that may Lock the driver's door using the
cause undesired operation. integrated key in the door lock, or
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to Press down the lock button of the front
these devices could void the user's authority to passenger door and close the door from
operate this equipment. the outside.
Using the door lock Manual operation

If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock
General information the driver's door using the integrated key in the
door lock.
Opening and closing: from the

inside
Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl
edge.
34
Locking and unlocking Locking

Press the button in the vehicle. Press the button. The doors are
locked.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
locked when the front doors are closed, but they you from being locked out, the opened driv
are not secured against theft. er's door cannot be locked using the lock
button.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Take the remote control with you
Automatic locking People or animals left unattended in a
The setting is stored for the remote control cur parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in
rently in use. side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
1. "Settings"
then be opened from the outside.
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
"Lock if no door is opened" Tailgate
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not Opening
opened. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
"Lock after start. to drive" Ensure that adequate clearance is available be
The vehicle locks automatically after fore opening.
you drive away. Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec
tion.
Opening from the inside
Unlocking and opening

Press the button. The doors are un
locked. To open, pull the door han
dle above the armrest.
Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time and
opened the second time. Press the button.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is
stationary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
35
Opening from the outside Closing
Press the button next to the tailgate. Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
Press the remote control button for ap can be used to conveniently pull down the tail
prox. 1 second and then release. gate.
The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung up Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the
ward. cargo floor panel is not raised, refer to
page 118.
Opening manually Keep the closing area clear
In case of an electrical malfunction: Make sure that the closing area of the tail
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge
result.
the cargo area, refer to page 115.
2. From the cargo area, press out the handle in
the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far as
possible. The tailgate is unlocked. Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press Comfort Access supports the following func
in the handle. tions:
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
closed. Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
Starting the engine.
Convenient closing.
36
Functional requirement To save battery power, ensure that the ignition

To lock the vehicle, the remote control must and all electronic systems and/or power con
be located outside of the vehicle. sumers are switched off before locking the ve
hicle.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. If a remote control is detected within the vehicle,
the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.
The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Convenient closing
Comparison with ordinary remote Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
control hold.
The functions can be controlled by pressing the In addition, the windows and the panoramic
buttons or via Comfort Access. glass sunroof close.
Monitor the closing process
Unlocking Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.
Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail
senger door completely, arrow 1. gate opens again.
This corresponds to pressing the button.

Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig
Locking nition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal,
otherwise the engine will start.
Starting the engine

The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 54.
Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with Switching off the engine in cars with
your finger for approx. 1 second. automatic transmission
This corresponds to pressing the but The engine can only be switched off with trans
ton. mission position P engaged, refer to page 56.
37
To switch the engine off with transmission po Replacing the battery

sition N engaged, insert the remote control in The remote control for Comfort Access con
the ignition lock. tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
Malfunction
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
control, refer to page 30.
by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone
in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or 2. Remove the cover.
when a mobile phone is being charged in the
vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
control into the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument 3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
cluster lights up when you attempt to the positive side facing upwards.
start the engine: the engine cannot be 4. Press the cover closed.
started. Return used battery to a recycling collec
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a tion point or to your service center.
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces
sary, insert another remote control into the ig
nition switch. Alarm system
The warning lamp in the instrument The concept
cluster lights up while the engine is The vehicle alarm system responds to:
running: the remote control is no lon Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
ger inside the vehicle.
Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
After switching off the engine, the engine can sensor, refer to page 39.
only be started again within approx. 10 seconds
Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at
if no door has been opened.
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
The indicator lamp in the instrument Interruptions in battery voltage.
cluster comes on and a message ap The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
pears on the Control Display: replace
By sounding an acoustic alarm.
the remote control battery.
By switching on the hazard warning system.
By flashing the high beams.
38
Arming and disarming the alarm The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
system 2 seconds:
The system is armed.
General information
The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
cured.
Door lock and armed alarm system The indicator lamp flashes continuously af
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
sensor is not active.
on some market-specific versions.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition. The vehicle has not been tampered with.
If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
Tailgate and armed alarm system until the remote control is inserted in the ig
The tailgate can be opened using the remote nition, but for no longer than approx. 5 mi
control, even if the alarm system is armed. nutes:
Press the button on the remote control. An alarm has been triggered.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni
Panic mode
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once. In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys
tem:
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if Press the button on the remote control for at
the vehicle was unlocked first. least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control, Tilt alarm sensor
refer to page 32. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Insert the remote control all the way into the The alarm system responds in situations such
ignition lock. as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Interior motion sensor

mirror For the sensor to function properly, the windows
and panoramic glass sunroof must be closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol
lowing situations:
In duplex garages.
During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
39
When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Closing

Danger of pinching
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
Press the remote control button again
otherwise, injuries may result.
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
onds and then flashes continuously.
The window closes while the switch is held.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
remain switched off until the vehicle is locked
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
again.
point.
The window closes automatically.
Power windows Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
General information remote control or the door lock.
Take the remote control with you Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com
Take the remote control with you when fort Access.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure After the ignition is switched off
themselves. When the remote control is removed or the ig
nition is switched off, the windows can continue
to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as
no door is opened.
Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro
tection
Opening
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other
Press the switch to the resistance
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
point.
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Do not use window accessories
Press the switch beyond the resist Do not install any accessories in the range
ance point. of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
The window opens automatically. pinch protection system will be impaired.
Pressing again stops the motion.
40
Closing without the pinch protection Take the remote control with you
system Take the remote control with you when
For example, if there is an external danger or if leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
ice on the windows prevents a window from cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec
Tilting the glass sunroof
tion.
Press the switch briefly.
Safety switch The closed roof is tilted and
With the safety switch, the rear windows are the sliding visor opens
prevented from being opened or closed via the slightly.
switches in the rear passenger area, such as by The opened roof closes until
children. it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays completely
Press the button. open.
The LED lights up if the safety function is Pressing the switch again
switched on. closes the sliding visor al
Safety switch for rear operation most completely.
Press the safety switch when transporting Do not use force to close the sliding visor
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
if the windows are closed without supervision.
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.
Panoramic glass sunroof Opening/closing the sliding visor

General information Press the switch in the de
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be sired direction to the resist
operated together or separately using the ance point and hold it there.
switch. The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
Danger of pinching
Press the switch in the desired direction
Monitor the closing process and make
past the resistance point.
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result. The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
41
Opening/closing the glass sunroof extreme situations, such as when thin objects
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri are present.
bed under Sliding visor.
Closing without the pinch protection
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and system
sliding visor together For example, if there is an external danger, pro
Press the switch twice in the de ceed as follows:
sired direction past the resist 1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist
ance point. ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi Pinch protection is limited and the roof re
sor move together. Pressing the opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
switch again stops the motion. certain value.
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
remote control or the door lock. resistance point and hold until the roof
Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com closes without pinch protection.
fort Access.
Initialization after a power failure
Comfort position After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. the roof, if necessary.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com Have the system initialized by your service cen
partment. ter.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
the switch.
After the ignition is switched off

The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi
nute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system

If the closing force when closing the glass sun
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
42
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Adjusting manually

tems.
Sitting safely Forward/backward

Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
The ideal seating position can make a vital con position.
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
The seating position plays an important role in or back slightly to make sure it engages prop
an accident in combination with: erly.
Safety belts, refer to page 45.
Head restraints, refer to page 46. Height
Airbags, refer to page 85. Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Seats Backrest tilt
Note before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
Do not incline the backrest too far to the Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest
rear or lift it off, as necessary.
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.
43
Controls Adjusting
Seat tilt
4 Backrest
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat The head restraint can be adjusted manually,
or lift it off, as necessary. refer Head restraints below.
Thigh support Lumbar support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
ward or back. to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup
Adjusting electrically plementary support to help you maintain a re
laxed, upright sitting position.
Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.
Backrest width
1 Forward/backward
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
44
Adjusting Controls
The width of the backrest can be changed with Safety belts

the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs. General information
Press front or rear section of switch. Always make sure that safety belts are being
The backrest width decreases or increases. worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
Adjusting the rear seat backrests added protection, they are not a substitute for
Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 115. safety belts.
Seats with safety belt

Seat heating The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
into the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
The belt buckle embossed with the word
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
passengers riding in the center position.
If the middle safety belt is used in the rear,
the left backrest must be locked, refer to
Switching on page 115; otherwise, the safety belt will not
Press the button once for each temper have a restraining effect.
ature level.
Notes
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit. One person per safety belt
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes, Never allow more than one person to wear
the seat heating is activated automatically with a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
the temperature set last. children to ride on a passenger's lap.
Putting on the belt

Switching off
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
Press the button longer. across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
The LEDs go out. body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to around the hips in the lap area and does not
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
tery. The LEDs remain lit. slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka
ble objects, or be pinched.
45
Controls Adjusting
Reduction of restraining effect Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder checked.
belt periodically to readjust the tension across Checking and replacing safety belts
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
Have the work performed only by your
safety belt may be reduced.
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.
Buckling the belt
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
belt buckle. risk of injury in an accident.
Unbuckling the belt Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap
1. Hold the belt firmly.
prox. at ear level.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and as close as possible to the back of the head.
front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig Front
nal sounds. In addition, a message ap
pears on the Control Display. Check Height adjustment
whether the safety belt has been fas
tened correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds

above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts

In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage: To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
46
Adjusting Controls
Rear Storing
Height adjustment
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni

tion, refer to page 54.
To raise: pull. 2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and desired positions.
push the head restraint down.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
The height of the middle head restraint cannot button lights up.
be adjusted.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The
LED goes out.
Removing at the front and rear
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Press the button again. The LED goes
1. Pull upward as far as possible. out.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely
pull out the head restraint with the rear seat Calling up settings
backrest folded forward slightly. Do not retrieve the memory setting while
Before transporting passengers driving
Reinstall the head restraint before trans Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving,
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro as an unexpected seat movement could result
tective function of the head restraint is unavail in an accident.
able.
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
Seat and mirror memory switch on the radio ready state, refer to
page 54.
General information 2. Briefly press the desired memory but
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror ton 1 or 2.
positions can be stored and retrieved. The seat is automatically moved to the stored
The adjustment of the backrest width and the position.
lumbar support is not stored in the memory. The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
47
Controls Adjusting
Safety mode Adjusting electrically

1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni The setting corresponds to the direction
tion on or off, refer to page 54. in which the button is pressed.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com
Saving positions
pleted.
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 47.
Mirrors Adjusting manually

If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
Exterior mirrors press the edges of the mirror glass.
General information Automatic Curb Monitor

The mirror on the passenger side is more curved When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
than the driver's mirror. glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
Estimating distances correctly
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer example.
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see Activating
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident. 1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
At a glance 2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission
position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out

Press button 2.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
1 Adjusting
For example, this is advantageous
2 Fold in and out
In car washes.
3 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
In narrow streets.
For folding back mirrors that were folded
Selecting a mirror away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto
To change over to the other mirror:
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
48
Adjusting Controls
Fold in the mirror in a car wash Keep the photocells clean.

Before entering an automatic car wash, Do not cover the area between the inside
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the rearview mirror and the windshield.
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de
pending on the width of the vehicle.
Steering wheel
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both General information
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when Do not adjust while driving
the engine is running or the ignition is switched Do not adjust the steering wheel while
on. driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.

From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi
tion.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature 3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam
aged.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Two photocells are used for control:
In the mirror glass, see arrow. On: the LED lights up.
On the back of the mirror. Off: the LED goes out.
For proper operation:
49
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment passenger side are deactivated. Automatic de
activation of front passenger airbags, refer to
This chapter describes all series equipment as page 86.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also Deactivating the front passenger airbags
describes equipment that may not be found in If a child restraint fixing system is used in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected the front passenger seat, the front passenger
special equipment or the country version. This airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys an increased risk of injury to the child when the
tems. airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.
The right place for children

Installing child restraint fixing
Note
systems
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the Notes
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them Manufacturer's information for child re
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the straint fixing systems
doors.
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
Children should always be in the rear the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro
Accident research shows that the safest place tective effect can be impaired.
for children is on the rear seat.
Transporting children in the rear On the front passenger seat
Transport children younger than 13 years After installing a child restraint fixing system on
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear only, the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
using child restraint fixing systems suitable for and side airbags on the front passenger side are
the age, weight, and height of the child; other deactivated.
wise, there is an increased risk of injury in an ac Deactivating the front passenger airbags
cident.
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a the front passenger seat, the front passenger
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their an increased risk of injury to the child when the
age, weight and size. airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint Seat position and height
fixing system on the front passenger seat, make Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
sure that the front and side airbags on the front move the front passenger seat as far back as
50
Transporting children safely Controls
possible and adjust its height to the highest po 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
sition to obtain the best possible position for the 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event pletely.
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this. LATCH child restraint fixing
system
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 44, completely. Do not Note
change the backrest width after this. Manufacturer's information for LATCH
Backrest width for the child seat child restraint fixing systems
Before installing a child restraint fixing To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest ing systems, observe the operating and safety
width must be opened completely. Do not information from the system manufacturer; oth
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.
stability of the child seat will be reduced.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Child seat security Correctly engage the lower LATCH an
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix
ing system is resting snugly against the back
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger

safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
the belt. located behind the indicated cover caps.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re
system. The safety belt is locked.
straint fixing system.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
51
Controls Transporting children safely
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing Outer rear seats

systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap
Mounting points 1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re

There are three mounting points, see arrows, for taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the upper retaining strap of LATCH child re the cargo cover.
straint fixing systems.
LATCH mounting eyes

Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.
Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.
52
Transporting children safely Controls
Center rear seat On center rear seat:
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the

middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
1 Direction of travel
Locking the doors and
2 Head restraint windows
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap Rear doors
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re

taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
Attaching the upper retaining strap to rear.
the mounting point This locks the rear window switches so that the
On outer rear seats: windows cannot be operated from the rear:
safety switch, refer to page 41.
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po
sition.
53
Controls Driving
Driving
Vehicle equipment Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected You can only take out the remote control if trans
special equipment or the country version. This mission position P is engaged: interlock.
tems.
Start/Stop button
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig

nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed

when you press the Start/Stop button.
Insert the remote control all the way into the ig
Radio ready state
nition lock.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
The time and the external temperature are dis
electrical consumers can operate.
played in the instrument cluster.
Comfort Access Radio ready state is switched off automatically:

If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only When the remote control is removed from
insert the remote control into the ignition lock, the ignition lock.
refer to page 36, under special circumstances. In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
page 36, by touching the surface above the
Removing the remote control from the door lock.
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
Ignition on
of the ignition lock All electrical consumers can operate. The od
ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the
instrument cluster.
ignition lock as this may cause damage.
54
Driving Controls
To save battery power when the engine is off, Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
electronic systems/power consumers. away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Radio ready state and ignition off Starting the engine

All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Automatic transmission, 8-gear

In certain situations, transmission position P is
engaged automatically. To make it possible for
the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car
wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re
fer to page 259.
Starting the engine Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Com
fort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
General information
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Enclosed areas
2. Engage transmission position P if neces
Do not let the engine run in enclosed sary.
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an The ignition is activated automatically for a cer
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas. tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten Engine stop
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running, General information
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi Take the remote control with you
tion P and set the handbrake firmly; otherwise, Take the remote control with you when
the vehicle may begin to roll. leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
Frequent starting in quick succession cannot operate the windows and injure them
selves.
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in Set the handbrake and further secure the
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not vehicle as required
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is Set the handbrake firmly when parking; other
the danger of overheating and damaging the wise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and
catalytic converter. downward inclines, further secure the vehicle,
for example, by turning the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb.
55
Controls Driving
Before driving into a car wash The brake pedal remains depressed while
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an the vehicle is at a standstill.
automatic car wash, follow the information on The driver's safety belt is fastened or the
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to driver's door is closed.
page 259. When the engine is switched off, the air volume
of the automatic climate control is reduced.
Switching off the engine
Indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
The indicator lamp lights up when the
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve
Auto Start/Stop function is ready to
hicle stopped.
start the engine automatically.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the handbrake firmly. The indicator lamp lights up if the re
quirements for an automatic engine
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition
stop are not fulfilled.
lock, refer to page 54.
Note
Automatic Engine Start/Stop The engine is not switched off automatically in
Function the following situations:
External temperatures below ap
The concept prox. 37 /+3 .
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. High external temperature and operation of
The system switches off the engine during a the automatic climate control.
stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic
The interior is not yet heated or cooled as
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
much as desired.
engine starts automatically when you wish to
drive away. The engine is not yet at operating tempera
ture.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system. Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel
is being turned.
Automatic operation After driving in reverse.
The automatic engine Start/Stop function is op Fogging of the windows when the automatic
erational after each engine start. climate control is switched on.
The function is activated at a certain speed: Vehicle battery charge is very low.
Automatic transmission: at 5 mph/9 km/h. Hood is unlocked.
HDC is activated.
Automatic engine stop
Stop-and-go traffic.
The engine is switched off automatically during
The selector lever is in position N or S/M.
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission: The indicator lamp is lit.
The selector lever is in transmission position

D.
56
Driving Controls
Parking the vehicle during an The vehicle begins to roll.

automatic engine stop Automatic transmission: the transmission
The vehicle can be parked safely during an au position is changed from D to N, R or M/S.
tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to Automatic transmission: the transmission
leave the vehicle. position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is S.
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function Fogging of the windows when the automatic
is deactivated. climate control is switched on.
Automatic transmission: transmission posi Vehicle battery charge is very low.
tion P is engaged automatically. The interior has cooled down strongly with
2. Set the handbrake. the heating switched on.
Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop Low braking pressure, such as from de
button. pressing the brake pedal a number of times
consecutively.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically under the fol Preventing automatic engine stop with
lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive an automatic transmission
away:
The concept
Automatic transmission:
To permit the driver to drive away especially
The brake pedal is released.
quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. engine stop can be actively prevented.
Safety mode Preventing the engine stop using the

The engine does not start by itself after it is brake pedal
switched off automatically if any of the following The engine stop can be actively prevented
conditions are fulfilled: within one second after the vehicle comes to a
The driver's safety belt is unfastened or the standstill.
driver's door is open. Depress the brake pedal briefly and force
Hood was unlocked. fully immediately after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up. A mes
sage appears on the Control Display. Then continue depressing the brake pedal
with normal braking force.
The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
Note
Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop
ped engine still starts automatically in the fol
lowing situations:
The interior has heated up strongly with the
cooling function switched on.
The steering wheel is turned.
57
Controls Driving
Activating/deactivating the system Indicator lamp

manually The indicator lamp lights up and an
acoustic signal sounds when driving
away. The handbrake is still set.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Press the button.

LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function lever.
is activated.
Notes
Automatic deactivation
Using the handbrake while driving
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func
tion is deactivated automatically in the interest If it should become necessary to use the
of safety, for example if the driver's absence is handbrake while driving, do not pull the hand
detected. brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the
handbrake lever pressed at all times.
Malfunction Excessive application of the handbrake can
block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
The indicator lamp lights up. The au
the vehicle.
tomatic engine start/stop function no
longer switches of the engine auto To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action,
matically.A message appears on the Control lightly apply the handbrake from time to time
Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have when coasting, traffic conditions permitting.
the system checked.
The brake lamps do not light up when the hand
brake is pulled.
Handbrake
The concept
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
58
Driving Controls
Turn signal, high beams, 3. "Triple turn signal"

headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn sig
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect. The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.
High beams, headlamp flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the re
sistance point. 1 High beams
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in 2 Headlamp flasher
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
Washer/wiper system
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
Notes
flash.
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Triple turn signal activation Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro
Press the lever to the resistance point. zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
The turn signal flashes three times.
damaged.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield
1. "Settings"
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield;
2. "Lighting"
otherwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap
idly or become damaged.
59
Controls Driving
At a glance Intermittent wipe or rain sensor

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or the rain

1 Switching on wipers sensor
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1. Press the button, arrow 3.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and
sition when released. a wiping cycle is started.
Normal wiper speed

Setting intermittent wipe or the
Press up once. sensitivity of the rain sensor
The system switches to operation in the inter Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or the
Fast wiper speed rain sensor
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist Press the button again, arrow 3.
ance point.
The LED goes out.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
Switching off wipers or brief wipe through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2. age could be caused by undesired wiper activa
tion.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po
sition when released.
Cleaning the windshield and
Brief wipe: press down once. headlamps
To switch off normal wipe: press down once. Pull the lever, arrow 4.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
60
Driving Controls
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
shield and activates the wipers briefly. move to their resting position and are ready
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, for operation.
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and ap
propriate intervals. Rear window wiper
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.
1 Intermittent wipe
When reverse gear is engaged, the system
Windshield washer nozzles
switches to continuous operation.
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au
2 Cleaning the rear window
tomatically while the engine is running or the ig
nition is switched on. The rear window wiper does not move if the lever
is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
To switch on the rear window wiper:
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example. 1. Move the lever to its basic position.
2. Select the required position again.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the Do not use the washing mechanisms
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind when the washer fluid reservoir is empty
shield. Do not use washing mechanisms when the
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, will damage the washer pump.
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the Washer fluid
washer/wiper system, refer to page 59, must be
reactivated. General information
Fold the wipers back down Antifreeze for washer fluid
Before switching the ignition on, fold the Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, it away from sources of ignition.
the wipers may become damaged when they are Only keep it in the closed original container and
switched on. inaccessible to children.
1. Switch on the ignition. Follow the instructions on the container.
61
Controls Driving
Washer fluid reservoir Disengaging the remote control

Adding washer fluid To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the
cool, and then close the cover completely to
remote control from the ignition lock, refer to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
page 54.
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk Selector lever positions
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.
P R N D M/S +
Displays in the instrument cluster
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser

voir.
Fill with water and if required with a washer The selector lever position is displayed and the
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
ommendations. manual mode.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio. Changing selector lever positions
With the ignition switched on or the engine
Capacity running, the selector lever can be moved out
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters. of position P.
When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
brake before shifting out of P or N; other
Automatic transmission with wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
Steptronic, 6-gear Press on the brake pedal until you start
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears driving
can also be shifted manually using Steptronic, To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
refer to page 63. you select a driving position, maintain pres
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
Parking the vehicle to start.
Secure the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, move the selector lever to position P
and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle
will begin moving.
62
Driving Controls
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging

selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the
lock, press the button on the front of the selector
lever, see arrow.
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
rear wheels are locked. This position is recommended for a perform
ance-oriented driving style.
R is Reverse
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The Activating the M/S manual mode
vehicle can roll. Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
D Drive, automatic position
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
ward gears are selected automatically.
changed.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po
cluster, e.g., M1.
sition D.
To shift down: press the selector lever for
Kickdown ward.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving To shift up: press the selector lever back
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond ward.
the resistance point at the full throttle position. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument
panel, followed by the current gear.
63
Controls Driving
Shifting gears using the shift paddles 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever un
on the steering wheel til the sleeve is inside out.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
When the shift paddles on the steering
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto
matic mode, the transmission switches to
manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
the transmission switches back to auto 4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, refer
matic mode. to page 245, press the red lever while mov
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, ing the selector lever to the desired position
manual mode remains active. with the button pressed.
Automatic transmission with

Steptronic, 8-gear
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation. All for
ward gears are available.
Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con
Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle .
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate sition D.
down if the engine speed is too high. The se Kickdown
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
panel, followed by the current gear. performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al R is Reverse
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
depressed, and the button on the selector lever
is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over N is Neutral
ridden: The vehicle can roll.
1. Switch off the ignition. N remains engaged after the engine is switched
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. off if the remote control remains in the ignition
lock. This function can be used in an automatic
car wash, refer to page 259, for example. P is
automatically engaged after approx. 30 minutes.
64
Driving Controls
P Park Engaging transmission positions D, R,

The drive wheels are blocked. N
P is engaged automatically when the following
conditions are met:
The driver's door is opened while the engine
is running, the safety belt is not fastened and
neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator
is activated.
The engine is switched off unless N is en
gaged and the remote control is in the igni
tion lock.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di
The remote control is removed from the ig
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
nition lock.
When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the trans push the unlock button 1.
mission position P is engaged; otherwise, the
The engaged transmission position is displayed
vehicle may begin to roll.
on the selector lever.
Engaging transmission position After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Transmission position P can only be disen
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed. Engaging transmission position P
With the vehicle stationary, press on the Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Press button P.
65
Controls Driving
Sport program and manual mode M/S Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
Activating the Sport program The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears while in automatic mode
D, the transmission temporarily switches to
manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
the transmission switches back to auto
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans matic mode D.
mission position D. With the transmission position M/S selected,
the manual mode remains active.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis
played in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating manual mode

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
changed.
Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
cluster, e.g., M1.
To shift down: press the selector lever for down if the engine speed is too high.
ward.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in
To shift up: press the selector lever back strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the Sport program/manual

mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
66
Driving Controls
The transmission position is displayed and the

engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
67
Controls Displays
Displays
Vehicle equipment The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.
well as country-specific and special equipment Time, external temperature display
Set the time, refer to page 72.
External temperature warning
also applies to safety-related functions and sys If the display drops to +37 /+3 , a signal
tems. sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Odometer, external Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 ,
temperature display, clock there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan
ger of an accident.
Odometer and trip odometer

Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
1 Knob in the instrument cluster

When the vehicle is parked
2 External temperature display and clock
If you still want to view the time, external tem
3 Odometer and trip odometer perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition
Knob in the instrument cluster lock:
Press the knob. Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is switched on, the trip

odometer is reset.
When the ignition is switched off, the time,
external temperature and odometer are dis
played.
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and or for the external
temperature, refer to page 72.
68
Displays Controls
Tachometer Engine oil temperature
Never force the engine speed up into the red Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
supply is interrupted to protect the engine. vehicle speeds.
Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the tem
Coolant temperature perature display.
Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and perature end. Switch off the engine imme
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi diately and allow it to cool down.
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis
play. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes
Check the coolant level, refer to page 242. sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 239.
Current fuel consumption

Fuel gauge
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can

check whether you are currently driving in an ef The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner. vary.
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates
the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 224.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
69
Controls Displays
A message is briefly displayed on the Con Current fuel consumption.

trol Display. No information.
The remaining range is shown on the com To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
puter. to page 72.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine Information in detail
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a Range
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Refuel promptly
It is calculated based on your driving style over
At the latest, refuel at a range of
the last 18 miles/30 km.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the
engine was switched off manually are not in
Computer cluded in the average speed calculations.
Displaying information on the With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
instrument panel can have the average speed displayed for an ad
ditional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button on
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for an
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Press the computer button on the turn signal Control Display below.
lever. To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap
Information is displayed in the instrument clus prox. 2 seconds.
ter.
Current fuel consumption
Overview of the information
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig check whether you are currently driving in an ef
nal lever displays the information on the instru ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
ment cluster in the following order:
Range. Displays on the Control Display
ECO PRO bonus range. Display the computer or trip computer on the
Average speed. Control Display.
Average fuel consumption. 1. "Vehicle Info"
70
Displays Controls
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Resetting the fuel consumption and

speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Resetting the trip computer

Displays on the "Onboard info":
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information

Operating concept
Range. Certain settings and information can only be
Distance to destination. called up when the ignition is switched on. A
Estimated time of arrival if a destination was number of settings cannot be made while driv
entered in the navigation system, refer to ing.
page 140.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
1 Button for:
Selecting the display.
Departure time. Setting values.
Trip duration. 2 Button for:
Trip distance. Confirming the selected display or set
Both displays show: values.
Average fuel consumption and Calling up computer information70.
Average speed.
71
Controls Displays
Symbol Function Units of measure

With the lights switched on: The units for fuel consumption, route/distance,
Dimming instrument lighting, temperature, and pressure can be changed.
refer to page 83 1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Calling up Check Control, refer

to page 77
Checking the engine oil level,

refer to page 239
3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.
Setting the time, refer to
page 72 The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the date, refer to

Clock
page 73
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster

To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
Viewing service requirement
time format below.
display, refer to page 75
1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied
by the time and the word "SET".
Exiting displays
The external temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you make
no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required,
complete the current setting first.
2. Press button 2.
72
Displays Controls
3. Use button 1 to set the hours. 3. "Time:"

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via the iDrive

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
The main menu is displayed. are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
2. "Settings" 4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
currently in use.
Date
currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to
page 30.
Setting the time zone
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" In the instrument cluster
3. "Time zone:" To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
4. Select the desired time zone. to Setting the date format below.
The time zone is stored. 1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
73
Controls Displays
symbol appears in the display, accompanied 3. "Format:"

by the date and the word "SET". 4. Select the desired format.
2. Press button 2. The date format is stored.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way. Settings on the Control
6. Press button 2.
Display
The system stores the new date. Language
Via the iDrive Setting the language
1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" 2. "Language/Units"
3. "Date:" 3. "Language:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re
fer to page 26.
74
Displays Controls
Brightness The current service requirements can be read

out from the remote control by the service spe
Setting the brightness cialist.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the For certain maintenance operations, you can
ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic view the distance remaining or the due date for
setting can be adjusted. that operation in the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings" 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. "Control display" 2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
3. "Brightness" lever up or down repeatedly until the appro
priate symbol appears in the display, ac
companied by the words "SERVICE INFO".

is selected.
3. Press button 2.
5. Press the controller.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright Displays
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Symbol Function
Service requirements Service requirements
Engine oil
The remaining driving distance and the date of Roadworthiness test

the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
75
Controls Displays
Symbol Function To exit from the menu:

Front brake pads
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.

Rear brake pads
The deadline for service or a le

gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
Brake fluid
The service deadline has al
ready passed.
Entering dates
The sequence of displayed service items may Enter the dates for the required inspections.
vary. First the data for the next maintenance are Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
displayed. correctly, refer to page 73.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Detailed information on service
requirements 2. "Vehicle status"
More information on the scope of service re 3. "Service required"

quired can be displayed on the Control Display. 4. " Vehicle inspection"
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

6. "Date:"
3. "Service required" 7. Create the settings.
Required maintenance procedures and legally 8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
mandated inspections are displayed. year is highlighted.
Additional information can be displayed on each 9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
entry: 10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
Select the entry and press the controller. date entry is stored.
76
Displays Controls
To exit from the menu:

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto
matically transmitted to your service center be
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
The symbol indicates that Check Control
notified.
messages have been stored. The Check Control
1. "Vehicle Info" messages can be displayed later.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options". Text messages
4. "Last Service Request" Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display in combination with a symbol in the in
strument cluster explain a Check Control mes
Check Control sage and the meaning of the indicator and warn
ing lamps.
The concept
Supplementary text messages
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys Addition information, such as on the cause of a
tems monitored. fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, In urgent cases, this information will be shown
in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
text messages at the top of the Control Display.
Symbols
Indicator/warning lamps The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending on
the Check Control message.
"Service request"
Contact the service partner.
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
77
Controls Displays
Hiding Check Control messages companied by the words "CHECK CON

TROL".
Press the computer button in the turn signal

lever. 2. Press button 2.
If there is no Check Control message, this is
Some Check Control messages are displayed
indicated by "CHECK OK. If a Check Con
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
trol message has been stored, the corre
cannot be hidden.
sponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied
If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes by a text message on the Control Display.
sages are displayed consecutively.
3. Press button 1 to check for other messages.
They are marked with the symbol shown 4. Press button 2.
here.
The display again shows the external tem
Other Check Control messages are hidden au perature and the time.
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control
messages
They are marked with the symbol shown
here. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
Viewing stored Check Control
messages 4. Select the text message.
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro Messages after trip completion
priate symbol appears in the display, ac Special messages that were displayed during a
trip are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Speed limit
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a Check Control message to be
issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be
low the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
78
Displays Controls
Displaying, setting or changing the

limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the

limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
79
Controls Lamps
Lamps
Vehicle equipment Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe
describes equipment that may not be found in riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected charged and it would then be impossible to start
special equipment or the country version. This the engine.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
tems. one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 82.
At a glance Low beams

Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un
locked.
1 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light Activating/deactivating the welcome

control / high-beam Assistant / welcome lamps
lamps / daytime running lights 1. "Settings"
2 Lamps off / daytime running lights 2. "Lighting"
3 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 3. "Welcome light"
4 Low beams/welcome lamps
5 Fog lamps
Parking lamps/low beams,

headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is The setting is stored for the remote control cur
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off rently in use.
automatically in the following switch settings:
0, ,
80
Lamps Controls
Headlamp courtesy delay feature Daytime running lights

The low beams stay lit for a short while after the The daytime running lights light up in posi
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched tion 0, and . After the ignition is
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on. switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi
tion .
Setting the duration
1. "Settings" Activating/deactivating
2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings"
3. "Pathway light.: s" 2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"
4. Set the duration.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use. rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control

Switch position : the low beams are switched Adaptive light control
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi
light or if there is precipitation. The LED next to The concept
the symbol lights up. Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
tion of the road surface.
cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa
The low beams remain switched on independ
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you
the course of the road.
switch on the front fog lamps.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn
Personal responsibility
ing, up to a certain speed one of the two front
The automatic headlamp control cannot fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment provides improved illumination of the area inside
in determining when the lamps should be the curve.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions. Controls
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you Activating
should always switch on the lamps manually un Switch position with the ignition switched
der these conditions. on.
81
Controls Lamps
The turning lamps are automatically switched periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not
on depending on the steering angle or the use have enough power to start the engine.
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Switching off
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
when the vehicle is at a standstill. to the pressure point, arrow 3.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.
High-beam Assistant
Malfunction
The concept
The warning lamp lights up.A mes
sage appears on the Control Display. When the lights are switched on, this system
Adaptive light control is malfunction automatically switches the high beams on and
ing or has failed. Have the system checked as off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
soon as possible. the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
High beams/roadside parking switch the high beams on and off as usual.
lamps
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to .
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direction
of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
The system responds to light from oncoming
1 High beams traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad
2 Headlamp flasher equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
3 Roadside parking lamps
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Left and right roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long
High beams on, arrow 1.
82
Lamps Controls
High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres
ence of highly reflective signs.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
At low speeds.
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams. When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov
Activating/deactivating via iDrive ered with stickers, etc.
1. "Settings" If the sensor view field is dirty.
2. "Lighting" The view field of the sensor is located on the
front of the interior rearview mirror.
3. "High beam assistant"
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth mois
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
The setting is stored for the remote control cur switched on.
rently in use. Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
System limits
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
Personal responsibility
page 81, is activated, the low beams will come
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as on automatically when you switch on the fog
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment lamps.
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk. Instrument lighting
The system is not fully functional in situations The parking lamps or low beams must be
such as the following, and driver intervention switched on to adjust the brightness.
may be necessary:
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
In very unfavorable weather conditions,
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
83
Controls Lamps
play, accompanied by the brightness setting

and the word "SET".
Switching the interior lamps on and off
2. Press button 2. Press the button.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de

To switch off permanently: press the button for
sired brightness level.
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lamps.
Danger of burns
4. Press button 2.
Do not reach into the opening of the lamps;
The display again shows the external tem otherwise, there is a risk of burns.
perature and the time.
Ambient lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior light
Interior lamps ing can be set individually for some lamps.
General information
Selecting the color scheme
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps,
1. "Settings"
trunk lamps, and courtesy lamps are controlled
automatically. 2. "Lighting"
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the 3. "Ambient:"
door handles and illuminate the ground in front 4. Select the desired setting.
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 54.
84
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbags 3 Side airbags

2 Head airbags 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
85
Controls Safety
Protective action Never modify either the individual compo

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end also applies to steering wheel covers, the
collisions. dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered. In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
There should be no people, animals, or ob
jects between an airbag and a person. Do not touch the individual components imme
diately after the system has been triggered; oth
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis
Keep the dashboard and window on the
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
your service center or a workshop that has the
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
attach holders such as for navigation instru
ments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un
Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
could result in injury.
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors.
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats Automatic deactivation of the front
with integrated side airbags. passenger airbags
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack The system determines whether the front pas
ets, over the backrests. senger seat is occupied by measuring the re
sistance of the human body.
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest The front and side airbags on the front passen
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries ger side are activated or deactivated accordingly
can occur if the airbags are triggered. by the system.
Do not remove the airbag restraint system. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror shows the current status of the front pas
Do not remove the steering wheel.
senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
Do not apply adhesive materials to the air Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
86
Safety Controls
Leave feet in the footwell Indicator lamp for the front passenger
Make sure that the front passenger keeps airbags
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.
Child restraint fixing system in the front

passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc
tions under Children on the front passenger
seat, refer to page 50.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air

Malfunction of the automatic bags indicates the operating state of the front
deactivation system passenger airbags.
When transporting older children and adults, the The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in tivated or deactivated.
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica
The indicator lamp lights up
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
when a child who is properly
up.
seated in a child restraint fix
In this case, change the sitting position so that ing system intended for that
the front passenger airbags are activated and purpose is detected on the
the indicator lamp goes out. seat or the seat is empty. The
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have airbags on the front passen
the person sit in the rear. ger side are not activated.
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush The indicator lamp does not light up when,
ion can be detected correctly: for example, a correctly seated person of
Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion pad sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
ding, ball mats or other items to the passen airbags on the front passenger side are ac
ger seat unless they are specifically recom tivated.
mended by BMW. The system generally detects children seated in
Do not place any objects on the front pas a child seat, especially in the child seats that
senger seat. were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
Do not place objects under the seat that
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas
could press against the seat from below.
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas
senger airbags are not activated.
87
Controls Safety
Operational readiness of airbag system Functional requirements

The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
When the ignition is switched on,, refer Sudden serious tire damage caused by
to page 54, the warning lamp comes on external influences cannot be indicated in ad
briefly to indicate that the entire airbag vance.
system and the belt tensioners are operational.
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla
Airbag system malfunction tion pressure regularly.
The warning lamp does not light up after the The system could be delayed or malfunction in
ignition is switched on. the following situations:
Warning lamp remains permanently on. When the system has not been initialized.
Have the airbag system checked without When driving on a snowy or slippery road
delay if there is a malfunction surface.
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, high lateral acceleration.
there is the risk that the system will not function When driving with snow chains.
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
occurs. Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
FTM Flat Tire Monitor whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
The concept
2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla
tion pressure in the tires. 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing The status is displayed.
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving. Initialization
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and The initialization process adopts the set inflation
therefore the rotational speed of the corre tire pressures as reference values for the detec
sponding wheel change. This is detected and tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con
reported as a flat tire. firming the inflation pressures.
88
Safety Controls
Do not initialize the system when driving with Continued driving with a flat tire
snow chains. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. "Vehicle Info" 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu
2. "Vehicle status" vers.
3. "Reset" 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
5. Start the initialization with "Reset". pressure in all four tires.
6. Drive away. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
The initialization is completed while driving,
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
which can be interrupted at any time.
system.
The initialization automatically continues when
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
driving resumes.
tire inflation pressure:
Indication of a flat tire The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
The warning lamp lights up red. A and the driving style and conditions.
message appears on the Control Dis
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
possible driving distance is ap
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation prox. 50 miles/80 km.
pressure. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid its handling characteristics change, e.g., re
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
Do not continue driving without run-flat properties. Adjust your driving style accord
tires ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving Because the possible driving distance depends
may result in serious accidents. on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta actual distance may be smaller or greater de
bility Control is switched on if necessary. pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Run-flat tires
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
braking distance and altered self-steering prop
erties.
89
Controls Safety
Final tire failure Status display

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can 1. "Vehicle Info"
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed 2. "Vehicle status"
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
3. "TPM"
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con
tinue driving, and contact your service center. The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
The concept A change in the tire inflation pressure during
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the driving is taken into account.
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or by the TPM
more tires.
Wheels, green
Functional requirements The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
The system must have been reset while the in state.
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. One wheel is yellow
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
sure that the system will operate properly. the indicated tire.
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or All wheels are yellow
wheel change. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
System limits The system was not reset after a wheel
Sudden tire damage change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys
vance. tem is being reset.
The system does not operate correctly if it has Wheels, gray

not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres
sures. Reasons for this may be:
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat TPM is being reset.
tire: Disturbance by systems or devices with the
For a mounted wheel without TPM electron same radio frequency.
ics. Malfunction.
When the TPM is disturbed by other sys
tems or devices with the same radio fre
quency.
90
Safety Controls
Resetting the system Do not continue driving without run-flat

Reset the system after each correction of the tires
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
wheel change. equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec
3. "Reset"
essary.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". Actions in the event of a flat tire
6. Drive away.
Run-flat tires
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed. Maximum speed
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
setting process is completed automatically as
you drive. The tires are shown in green and Continued driving with a flat tire
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu
matically. vers.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is next opportunity.
shown.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
Low tire pressure message have been reset. Reset the system.
The small warning lamp lights up yel Possible driving distance with complete loss of
low and the large warning lamp lights tire inflation pressure:
up red. A message appears on the
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
Control Display. In addition, a signal
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
sounds.
and the driving style and conditions.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
flation pressure.
possible driving distance is ap
The system was not reset after a wheel prox. 50 miles/80 km.
change and thus issues warnings based on
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
the inflation pressures initialized last.
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid duced lane stability during braking, a longer
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
91
Controls Safety
Because the possible driving distance depends A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the have the service center check it if necessary.
actual distance may be smaller or greater de Malfunction: have the system checked by
pending on the driving speed, road conditions, your service center.
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys
Continued driving with a flat tire tem again.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a The small warning lamp flashes in yel
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. low and then lights up continuously;
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a the larger warning lamp comes on in
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re yellow. On the Control Display, the
duced lane stability during braking, a longer tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
braking distance and altered self-steering prop No flat tire can be detected.
erties.
Display in the following situations:
Final tire failure Disturbance by systems or devices with the
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can same radio frequency: after leaving the area
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed of the disturbance, the system automatically
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could becomes active again.
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con
tinue driving, and contact your service center. Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Message when the system was not Systems
reset Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
message appears on the Control Dis
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
play.
or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has
The system detected a wheel change but was tires of a different size than the size indicated on
not reset. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
tion pressure for those tires.).
pressure are not reliable.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
Malfunction
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
The small warning lamp flashes in yel the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
low and then lights up continuously; should stop and check your tires as soon as
the larger warning lamp comes on in possible, and inflate them to the proper pres
yellow. On the Control Display, the sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
tires are shown in gray and a message appears. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
No flat tire can be detected. failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the ve
Display in the following situations: hicle's handling and stopping ability.
92
Safety Controls
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for During heavy brake application, the inner
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re brake lamps light up in addition.
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi
mately one minute and then remain continu
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Brake force display

The concept
During normal brake application, the outer

brake lamps light up.
93
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as DSC
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also The concept
describes equipment that may not be found in DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected when driving away and accelerating.
special equipment or the country version. This DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi
also applies to safety-related functions and sys tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
tems. to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
Antilock Brake System ABS Adjust your driving style to the situation
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak An appropriate driving style is always the
ing. responsibility of the driver.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
brake applications, thus increasing active with DSC.
safety.
Do not reduce the additional safety margin with
ABS is operational every time you start the en a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk
gine. of an accident.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Electronic brake-force
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re
distribution duced during acceleration and when driving in
The system controls the brake pressure in the bends.
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Brake assistant Deactivating DSC

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Press and hold the button, but not lon

ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
94
Driving stability control systems Controls
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru Dynamic Traction Control
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti
DTC
vated together.
The concept
In the interest of better forward momentum, The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
brake intervention is performed in the manner of forward momentum is optimized.
a differential lock when the drive wheels spin The system ensures maximum forward momen
quickly even if DSC is deactivated. tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
Activating DSC
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri
Press the button. ate caution.
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un
instrument cluster go out. der the following special circumstances:
When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
For better control slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con
trols the drive forces and brake forces. When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in
deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed. When driving with snow chains.
DSC deactivated: Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic

The indicator lamp lights up and
Traction Control
DSC OFF appears in the instrument Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
cluster. provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instru
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for
DSC OFF lights up.
95
Controls Driving stability control systems
Deactivating DTC Hill Descent Control HDC

Press the button again.
The concept
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster go out. HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down
hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica
For better control tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con twice walking speed.
trols the drive forces and brake forces. You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
DTC has failed. driving downhill at below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
DTC activated: to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it con
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC stant.
TION appears in the instrument cluster. While you are actively braking, the system is on
standby. The system does not brake the vehicle
during this time.
Increasing or reducing speed

The speed can be changed in the range from
roughly twice walking speed to approx.
15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or
brake pedal lightly.
A target speed within the same range can be
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
DTC is activated.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle. To enhance performance during
sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of the
curve is braked while the resulting braking effect
is largely compensated by engine intervention.
1 Increasing speed
2 Decreasing speed
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axle depending on the driving sit
uation and prevailing road conditions.
96
Driving stability control systems Controls
Activating HDC Drive-off assistant

This system supports driving away on gradients.
The handbrake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with
out delay.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
Press the button; the LED above the
button lights up. After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap
automatically. prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated Servotronic
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
The concept
Using HDC The Servotronic varies the steering force re
quired to turn the wheels depending on the
HDC can be used in every driving position.
speed at which you are driving.
Displays in the instrument cluster Power steering provides strong support at low
speeds, which means that less effort is needed
to turn the wheels. Power steering support less
ens as your speed increases.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up.A mes
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos
sible.
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera
tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available due
to high brake temperatures or DSC has failed.
97
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment One lever for all functions

tems.
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat

Cruise control ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler
The concept ating
The system is functional at speeds beginning at 3 Deactivating cruise control
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained.
Maintaining current speed
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en
gine braking action is insufficient. Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
resistance point.
Do not use cruise control
The car's current speed is stored and main
Do not use the system if unfavorable con tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant briefly in the instrument cluster.
speed, for instance:
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
On curvy roads. maintain the set speed if current engine power
In heavy traffic. output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect
On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will
a loose road surface. brake the vehicle slightly.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle

Increasing desired speed
and cause an accident.
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached.
Each time the lever is pressed to the point of
resistance, the desired speed increases by
approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is in
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
98
Driving comfort Controls
The system stores and maintains the speed. Warning lamp

The warning lamp comes on when
Accelerating using the lever cruise control has been deactivated as
Accelerating slightly: a result of DSC intervention, for exam
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, ple. A message appears on the Control Display.
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly: Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, ar Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed
row 1, until the desired speed is reached. is resumed and maintained.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the In the following cases, the stored speed value is
accelerator pedal. The system stores and main deleted and cannot be called up again:
tains the speed. When driving stability control systems inter
vene.
Decreasing speed
When selector lever position N is engaged
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or transmission position D is disengaged.
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed. When the ignition is switched off.
Each time the lever is pulled to the resist

ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Each time the lever is pulled beyond the re
sistance point, the desired speed is reduced
by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum
speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control

Push the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. 1 Stored speed
The displays in the speedometer go out. 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
In addition, the system is automatically deacti
vated when: If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly,
conditions may not be adequate to operate the
The brakes are applied.
system.
Selector lever position N is engaged or
Call up Check Control messages, refer to
transmission position D is disengaged.
page 78.
When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti
vated. Malfunction
When DSC or ABS is intervening.
The warning lamp lights up. The sys
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
A message appears on the Control
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
Display. More information, refer to page 77.
again and maintained.
99
Park Distance Control PDC Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects can reach the physical
The concept limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the With tow bars and trailer hitches.
backup camera, refer to page 102, can be With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
switched on.
With low objects.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
proach to an object in front of or behind your ve
hicle is announced by: Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
Signal tones.
after a continuous tone sounds.
Visual display.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors False warnings
in the bumpers.
PDC may issue a warning under the following
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. conditions even though there is no obstacle
An acoustic warning is first given: within the detection range:
By the front sensors and two rear corner In heavy rain.
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. When sensors are very dirty or covered in
By the rear middle sensors at approx. ice.
5 ft/1.50 m. When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
System limits
In large buildings with right angles and
Check the traffic situation as well
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
In heavy exhaust.
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident sweeping machines, high pressure steam
could result from road users or objects located cleaners or neon lights.
outside of the PDC detection range.
Switching on automatically
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal With the engine running or the ignition switched
tone. on, shift the selector lever into position R.
Avoid driving quickly with PDC Switching off automatically when

Avoid approaching an object quickly. driving forward
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet The system switches off when a certain distance
active. or speed is exceeded.
For technical reasons, the system may other Switch on the system again if necessary.
wise be too late in issuing a warning.
100
Switching on/off manually Volume

You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 161.
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are displayed on the Control Display before a
Press the button. signal tone sounds.
On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker. The display appears as soon as PDC is acti
vated.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals. If the last image selected was the rear view cam
If the distance to a detected object is less than era, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is "Switch off rear view camera"
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind rently in use.
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded. Image on the Control Display
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds: Switching on the rear view camera
If the vehicle stops in front of an object that using iDrive
is detected by only one of the corner sen With PDC activated:
sors. "Rear view camera"
If moving parallel to a wall. The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The signal tone is switched off: The setting is stored for the remote control cur
When the vehicle moves away from an ob rently in use.
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
When transmission position P is engaged.
101
Malfunction Switching on automatically

With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
Switching off automatically when

driving forward
The system switches off when a certain distance
A Check Control message, refer to page 77, is or speed is exceeded.
displayed in the instrument cluster. Switch on the system again if necessary.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap
pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC
Switching on/off manually
has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Rear view camera Press the button.
The concept On: the LED lights up.
The rear view camera assists you when parking Off: the LED goes out.
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish this, If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam
the region behind your vehicle is shown on the era via the iDrive, refer to page 101.
Control Display.
Assistance functions
System limits
Functional requirement
Check the traffic situation as well
Rear view camera is switched on.
Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident Tailgate is completely closed.
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.
102
Pathway lines Parking using pathway and turning

lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
lead into the margins of the parking space.
Can be displayed in the image of the rear

view camera when the transmission is in re
verse.
Help estimate the required amount of space 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
when parking and maneuvering on a flat road the pathway line covers the corresponding
surface. turning circle line.
Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to

page 104.
Turning lines
Obstacle marking
Can be displayed in the image of the rear

view camera.
Show the path of the smallest turning circle
on a flat road surface. Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
When the steering wheel is turned, only one be displayed in the image of the rear view
turning line is displayed. camera.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to Their color gradation corresponds to the mark
page 104. ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
the object pictured.
103
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer Camera

to page 104.
Activating assistance functions

Several assistance functions can be active at the
same time.
Showing the parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
The lens of the rear view camera is under the
Showing the obstacle marking grasping lip of the tailgate.
"Obstacle marking"
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
played.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera

using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
rently in use.
Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.

is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
104
Climate Controls
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Manual air distribution 9 Temperature, right

2 Maximum cooling 10 Defrosting windows and removing conden
3 Temperature, left sation
4 AUTO program 11 Switching cooling function on/off manually
5 Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity 12 Rear window defroster
6 Display 13 Seat heating, right45
7 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu 14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep

lated air mode clear
8 ALL program 15 Seat heating, left45
105
Controls Climate
Comfortable interior climate Maximum cooling

For almost all conditions, the AUTO program 4 Press the button.
offers the optimum air distribution and air flow
The system is set to the lowest tem
rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
comfortable interior temperature only.
air mode.
The following sections contain more detailed in
formation on the available setting options. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re
Most of these settings are stored for the remote gion. Open them for this purpose.
control currently in use, Personal Profile set Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
tings, refer to page 31. At an external temperature of approx.
32 /0 .
Manual air distribution When the engine is running.
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro
gram: AUTO program
Windows. Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem
Upper body region.
perature are controlled automatically.
Footwell. Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO

intensity, and outside influences, the air is di
The programs can be combined as necessary. rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
Temperature The cooling function is switched on automati
cally with the AUTO program.
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature. At the same time, a condensation sensor con
trols the program in such a way that window
The automatic climate control
condensation is prevented as much as possible.
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible, if necessary To switch off the program: press the button
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, again or manually adjust the air distribution.
and then keeps it constant.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
perature settings. The automatic climate control control of the air volume and air distribution can
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set be adjusted.
temperature.
Press the left or right side of the button:
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
decrease or increase the intensity.
the highest setting, regardless of the external
temperature. The selected intensity is shown on the display
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re of the automatic climate control.
gardless of the external temperature.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
106
Climate Controls
Press the left or right side of the button: ALL program

decrease or increase air volume.
Press the button.
The selected air volume is shown on the display The current temperature setting for the
of the automatic climate control. driver's side is transferred to the front passenger
The air volume of the automatic climate control side.
may be reduced automatically to save battery
If the temperature setting is changed on the
power.
driver's side, the temperature on the front pas
senger side changes as well.
Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode The program is switched off if the setting is
changed on the front passenger side or the but
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu
ton is pressed again.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
Defrosting and defogging windows
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle. Press the button.
Press the button repeatedly to select Ice and condensation are quickly re
an operating mode: moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con
function.
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out
side air and controls the shutoff automati
Cooling function
cally.
The passenger compartment can only be
Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
cooled with the engine running.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per
manently blocked. Press the button.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off The air is cooled and dehumidified and
the recirculated-air mode and press the depending on the temperature setting
AUTO button to utilize the condensation warmed again.
sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield. Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The cooling function is switched on automati
The recirculated air mode should not be cally with the AUTO program.
used for an extended period of time, as the air
When using the automatic climate control, con
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.
densation water, refer to page 128, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Via the button on the steering wheel
A button on the steering wheel can be used to Rear window defroster
quickly switch between recirculated air mode Press the button.
and the previous setting.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
107
Controls Climate
Switching the system on/off Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in
Switching off coming air.
Press and hold the left button or, with The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
the setting at the lowest level, press the pollutants from the outside air that enters the
left button. vehicle.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win Your service center replaces this combined filter
dow defroster if it is switched on. during routine maintenance.
When the automatic climate control is switched

off, the supply of outside air is suspended. If the
air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over,
Parked-car ventilation
switch the system back on and increase the air
The concept
flow rate.
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
Switching on passenger compartment to lower interior tem
peratures.
Press any button, except for the buttons for the
ALL program or rear window heating. The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by using
Ventilation a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on
for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, refrain from activating it twice
in succession without allowing the battery to be
recharged in normal operation between use.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and 1. "Settings"
close the air vents 2. "Climate"
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the 3. "Activate parked-car vent."
air flow
Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direction,
e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.
Draft-free ventilation
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
The symbol on the automatic climate control

flashes if the system is switched on.
108
Climate Controls
Preselecting activation times

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.

lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
109
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment system being operated, the system is generally
compatible with the Universal Garage Door
This chapter describes all series equipment as Opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
describes equipment that may not be found in Your service center.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected www.homelink.com on the Internet.
special equipment or the country version. This HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
also applies to safety-related functions and sys Controls, Inc.
tems.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
Universal Garage Door

Opener
The concept
The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control
led systems, such as garage door drives or light
ing systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit
1 LED
ters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror must be programmed for the de 2 Buttons
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro
the system is needed for the programming pro gramming.
cedure.
During programming Programming
During programming and before activat
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door General information
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani 1. Switch on the ignition.
mals, or objects in the range of movement of the 2. Initial setup:
remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a
Press the right and left buttons on the inte
risk of injury or damage.
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte
held transmitter. rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored programmed settings of the buttons on the
functions for security reasons. interior rearview mirror are deleted.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys
Compatibility tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
If this symbol is printed on the packaging to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on
or in the operating instructions of the the interior rearview mirror. The required
110
Interior equipment Controls
distance depends on the particular hand- Synchronization:

held transmitter.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
4. Press the button of the desired function on controlled system.
the hand-held transmitter and the button
2. Program the corresponding button on the
being programmed on the interior rearview
interior rearview mirror as described.
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at 3. Identify and press the synchronization but
first. ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release
both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that 4. Press and hold the button on the interior
the button on the interior rearview mirror has rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
been programmed. then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the synchro
If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec
nization procedure. When synchronization
onds, change the distance between the in
is completed, the programmed function is
terior rearview mirror and the hand-held
executed.
transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple tri
als at different distances may be necessary.
Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
The systems can be operated with the buttons
memory buttons.
on the interior rearview mirror.
The required distance depends on the par
Special characteristics of alternating- ticular hand-held transmitter.
code radio systems 3. Press the memory button of the Universal
If the system cannot be operated after repeated Garage Door Opener.
programming, check whether the system to be 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
operated uses an alternating-code system. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
Read the operating instructions of the system or the hand-held transmitter.
press and hold the programmed button on the 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior rapidly.
rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
is equipped with an alternating-code system. the step.
This flashing LED pattern repeats itself for ap
prox. 20 seconds. Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
In systems with an alternating-code system, the and repeat the step. If programming was
Universal Garage Door Opener and the system aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
must be additionally synchronized. down the memory button and press and re
Please obtain additional information on syn lease the button on the hand-held transmit
chronization in the operating instructions of the ter several times for 2 seconds.
system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.
111
Controls The display shows you the main or secondary

compass direction in which you are driving.
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal Operating concept
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
Various functions can be called up by pressing
people, animals, or objects in the range of move
the adjustment button with a pointed object
ment of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of
such as a pen. The following adjustment options
injury or damage.
are displayed one after the other, depending on
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- how long the adjustment button is pressed:
held transmitter.
Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
operated using the button on the interior rear
6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
view mirror with the engine running or the igni
tion switched on. When you are within the re 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
ception range of the system, press and hold the steering.
button until the function is initiated. The LED on 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
the interior rearview mirror lights up continu
ously while the radio signal is being transmitted. Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve
Deleting stored functions hicle's geographic location so that the compass
Press the right and left buttons on the interior can function correctly; refer to the world map
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. with compass zones.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions can
not be deleted individually.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
112
Press the adjustment button for 34 seconds. 2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
The number of the compass zone set is shown 3. Press the adjustment button for 67 sec
in the display. onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full
To change the zone setting, briefly press the circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
adjustment button repeatedly until the display When the system is calibrated, the C is re
shows the number of the compass zone corre placed by the compass directions.
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx. Right-hand/left-hand steering
10 seconds. The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
hand steering at the factory.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Setting the language
following situations: Press the adjustment button for 1213 seconds.
An incorrect compass direction is shown. Briefly press the adjustment button again to
switch between English "E" and German "O".
The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel The setting is automatically saved after approx.
changes. 10 seconds.
Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough space
to drive in a circle.
113
Ashtray/cigarette lighter Sockets

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Opening electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Front center console
Pull cover 2 up.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
on, press in the cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
Rear center console
back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them
selves.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Connecting electrical devices
In storage compartment under center
Note armrest
Do not connect the charger to the socket To access the socket: remove the cover.
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.
114
In cargo area Front cover

1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets on
both sides at the rear, arrow.
Fold open the cover.
2. Pull the cover back, lifting it up and out of the

Cargo area side brackets.
Cargo covers Enlarging the cargo area

Do not place objects on the covers General information
Do not place objects on the covers. If you The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu the rear seat backrests.
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
damage the covers.
40-20-40.
To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different
moved. positions between the comfort and transport
positions and they can be folded down.
Rear cover
In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted
1. Detach the securing straps from the tailgate. back to the greatest possible angle and in the
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it transport position they are nearly vertical.
back and out of the brackets, arrows 2. Before mounting a child restraint fixing system,
note the instructions, refer to page 50.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back
rests, ensure that path of movement of the back
rests is clear. Especially when the middle sec
tion is folded down, ensure that no one is located
in or reaches into the path of movement of the
rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injuries or dam
age may result.
115
Observe the instructions concerning the Folding the backrests back up

safety belt When the backrests are folded back up, they
Observe the instructions concerning the safety engage in the transport position.
belt, refer to page 45. Otherwise, personal pro To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort posi
tection may be compromised. tion, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or the
loop of the center backrest forward.
Outside backrests Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac
cident due to unexpected seat movement.
Partition net
Firmly attach the partition net
Make sure that the partition net is firmly
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to attached; otherwise, injuries may result.
ward the front.
The partition net can be attached behind the
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position front or rear seats.
or fold it down.
On the left side, the outer and center backrests Before installing
are adjusted jointly toward the front if both back 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net
rests are engaged in the same lock-in position. from the storage compartment under the
The backrests can be adjusted separately to cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
ward the rear. Note that the center backrest can 2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un
not be tilted farther down than the left backrest. roll it, and unfold it.
After use, fold and roll up the partition net in
Center backrest only the same manner and place it in the pouch
so that it can be stowed back under the
cargo floor panel.
Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles
do not rest on the rod elements.
3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
the rod elements engage.
Mounting eyes
Four mounting eyes are located on the back of
1. Pull the loop, arrow.
the rear seat backrests.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position
or fold it down.
116
4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re

taining straps into the eyelets on the rear
seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.
Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1.

Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2.
Label 5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,

tighten the retaining straps using the ten
Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi
sioning buckles.
tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back.
The partition net is labeled accordingly. Installation behind the front seats
Installation behind the rear seats

1. If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for
ward and remove the front cargo cover, refer
to page 115.
2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear brack
ets in the headliner to the point where they
engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the
way into the holders on both sides and slide 1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
forward. Enlarging the cargo area.
2. Fold open the cover caps of the front brack
ets in the headliner to the point where they
engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the way
into the holders on both sides and slide for
ward.
4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re
taining straps into the upper eyelets on the
rear seat backrest on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten
sioning buckles.
117
Removing ward, pressing it into the gap between the cargo

To remove and stow the partition net, proceed area floor and the rear seat backrest.
in reverse order.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor
To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows. panel when it is upright.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel
when it is upright, do not press up or down on it,
and do not adjust the rear seat backrests; oth
erwise, damage may result.
Before closing the tailgate, fold down the cargo

floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel
toward the rear, raising it up and out of the gap.
The cargo floor panel can be removed if neces
sary.
Cargo floor panel
Lashing eyes
Compartment in floor To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw
Note the maximum permissible load straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo
area, refer to page 131.
Do not exceed a maximum load of
55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be
Multi-function hooks
neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage
may result.
To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor

age compartment at the rear.
To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge of
the storage compartment.
The storage compartment can be removed if
necessary.
Raising the cargo floor panel Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and
totes, for example, are located on the left and
right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.
Do not hang heavy items from the hooks

Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
objects flying about during braking and evasive
maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left, been appropriately secured.
right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for
118
Ski and snowboard bag

General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc
tions included in the protective jacket.
119
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment The light in the glove compartment switches on.
This chapter describes all series equipment as Close the glove compartment again im
well as country-specific and special equipment mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.
tems. Closing
Fold up the cover.
Notes USB interface for data transfer

No loose objects in the passenger com
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in
stance during braking and avoidance maneu
vers.
No non-slip mats on the dashboard

Do not use non-slip materials, such as Port for importing and exporting data, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be music collections, refer to page 176, on USB
damaged by the substances in the materials. devices.
Observe the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the con
Glove compartment nector into the USB interface.
Opening Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect a USB hard drive.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front

Storage compartment
Pull the handle. The center armrest between the front seats
contains a compartment with cupholders or the
120
Storage compartments Controls
cover for the snap-in adapter, depending on the When folding up, push the center armrest firmly
version. back into the rear seat backrest.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 202.
Connection for an external
Opening audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
AUX-IN port, refer to page 181.
USB audio interface, refer to page 182.
Pull the center armrest upward.
Interior
Adjusting Glove compartment, refer to page 120.
Compartments in the center console.
Compartments in the doors.
Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re
fer to page 122.
Cargo area
Lashing eyes, refer to page 131.
Storage compartment under the cargo floor
Slide the center armrest into the desired posi panel, refer to page 118.
tion. Left and right storage compartments.
Multi-function hook, refer to page 118.
Center armrest Storage compartment package

For your comfort:
Interior
Insertable cupholder, refer to page 122.
Front center armrest, refer to page 120.
Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
Retaining straps in the front door compart
ments.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. Rear center armrest with integrated cu
pholders.
121
Controls Storage compartments
Cargo area Unsuitable containers

Retaining strap on the left side panel for se Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain
curing small items. ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam
Retaining straps on the cargo area floor. age.
Insertable partition elements for the storage

compartment under the cargo floor panel, Front
used to variably subdivide the storage com In the front door compartments as a bottle
partment. holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam
With partition net: arrange the partition ele ple.
ments in such a way that there is enough Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
space at the rear of the storage compart the bottom slanted toward the front.
ment for the partition net. In the center console.
Storage net next to the storage compart
ment on the right in the cargo area. Insertable cupholder.
The insertable cupholder is located in the com
partment below the center armrest.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located at the grab han
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas console.
sengers during braking and evasive maneu
vers. Rear
In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for ex
Cupholders ample.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
Notes the bottom slanted toward the front.
Shatter-proof containers and no hot In the center armrest.
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.
122
Storage compartments Controls
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.
123
Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
conditions.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
well as country-specific and special equipment Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
tems.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob
Breaking-in period
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
General information
vehicle's operating life.
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a General driving notes
long vehicle life and good economy.
Closing tailgate
Engine and differential
Drive with the tailgate closed
Always obey all official speed limits.
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
accident occurs or during braking or evasive
speeds:
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may en
For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and ter the passenger compartment.
100 mph/160 km/h.
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
the tailgate open:
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles. Drive moderately.
Close all windows and the panoramic glass
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km sunroof.
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be Greatly increase the blower speed.
increased.
Hot exhaust system
Tires Hot exhaust system
Due to technical factors associated with their
High temperatures are generated in the
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac
exhaust system.
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe
riod.
126
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Do not remove the heat shields installed and Driving through water
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
system during driving, while in idle position
mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead Adhere to water depth and speed limita
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal tions
injury as well as property damage. Do not exceed this water depth and walking
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec
is the danger of getting burned. trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.
Mobile communication devices in the

vehicle Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
Mobile communication devices in the ve
feature.
hicle
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
way of braking in situations when this is neces
such as mobile phones without a direct connec
sary.
tion to an external aerial in the vehicle's passen
ger compartment. Otherwise, the vehicle elec The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
tronics and mobile communication devices can You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no of steering effort.
assurance that the radiation generated during Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
interior. active mode.
Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal
Hydroplaning
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal
form between the tires and road surface. pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan wear and possibly even brake failure.
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road Objects in the area around the pedals
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle. No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
Hydroplaning
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning. impeded while driving
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire Do not place additional floor mats over existing
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, mats or other objects.
refer to page 234. Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
127
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened Extended periods when the vehicle is not
again when they are returned after being re used at all.
moved, such as for cleaning. Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
Driving in wet conditions that must be exerted by the pads during brake
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly applications to clean the discs is not reached.
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
few miles. brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef
Ensure that this action does not endanger other fect that generally cannot be corrected.
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the Condensation under the parked vehicle
brake discs and pads. When using the automatic climate control, con
In this way braking efficiency will be available densation water develops that exits underneath
when you need it. the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
Hills vehicle are normal.
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a Driving on poor roads
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system
You can increase the engine's braking effect by with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
necessary.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other
Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic
wise the vehicle may be damaged.
transmission, refer to page 63.
Avoid load on the brakes For your own safety and the safety of passen
gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
points:
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
sibly even brake failure. driving; never take risks.
Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
Do not drive in neutral The steeper and rougher the road surface is,
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine the lower the speed should be.
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In When driving on steep uphill and downhill
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable grades: the engine oil and coolant should be
with the engine stopped. filled nearly to the MAX mark.
Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
Brake disc corrosion page 96, on steep downhill grades.
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination Watch for stones, holes, and other obstacles
on the brake pads are furthered by: and drive around these where possible.
Low mileage.
128
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact

between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 12 in
ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
Depending on the prevailing terrain, activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 95, briefly.
When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable
the driving stability control systems to dis
tribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
After driving on poor roads

Adhere to the following points to ensure vehicle
safety:
Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
129
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Vehicle equipment YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve
hicle and unstable driving situations may
This chapter describes all series equipment as result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
special equipment or the country version. This 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
also applies to safety-related functions and sys and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
tems. pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
General information For example, if the YYY amount equals
Overloading the vehicle 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying able cargo and luggage load capacity is
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in
creases the rate at which damage develops in 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
of tire inflation pressure. weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
No fluids in the cargo area in Step 4.
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam from your trailer will be transfered to your
aged. vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca
pacity of your vehicle.
Determining the load limit
Load
1. Locate the following statement on your ve

hicles placard:
The combined weight of occupants and The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or the occupants and the cargo.
130
Loading Driving tips
The greater the weight of the occupants, the Securing cargo

less cargo that can be transported.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Stowing cargo
Securing cargo
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not Smaller and lighter items: secure with re
occupied, secure each of the outer safety taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
belts in the opposite buckle. Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low straps.
as possible, ideally directly behind the back Cargo straps can be attached to two lashing
rests. eyes on the cargo area side panel, arrows 1,
Cover sharp edges and corners. and two lashing eyes on the cargo area rear
panel, arrows 2.
Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge
of the backrests. Securing cargo
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to Stow and secure the cargo as described
stow cargo. above; otherwise it may present a danger to the
occupants, for instance during braking and
Use the partition net, refer to page 116, to
avoidance maneuvers.
protect passengers. Make sure that objects
cannot penetrate the partition net. Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
Place protective material around any sharp-
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
edged or pointed objects that could bump
occupants, for instance during braking and
against the rear window while the vehicle is
avoidance maneuvers.
in motion.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, as
excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and
may also place you in violation of traffic safety
laws.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
using the upper top tether, refer to page 51,
mounting points; otherwise, these may become
damaged.
131
Driving tips Loading
Roof-mounted luggage rack Rear luggage rack

Notes Notes
A special rack system is available as an optional A special rear rack is available as an optional ac
accessory. cessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
Anchorage points rack.
The anchorage points are located on the roof
railing. Anchorage points
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roof-
mounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the panoramic glass sun
roof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of The anchorage points are under the covers in
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to
vehicle handling and steering response. page 258.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not be too large in area.
Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot
tom.
Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,
for instance using lashing straps.
Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen
tly.
132
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Closing the windows and
This chapter describes all series equipment as panoramic glass sunroof
well as country-specific and special equipment Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also windows open results in increased air resistance
describes equipment that may not be found in and raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
tems.
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
General information pressure, refer to page 228, at least twice a
month and before starting on a long trip.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re
sions. sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv Drive away without delay
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 243, can have an influence on fuel con Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
sumption and on the environmental impact. vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove unnecessary cargo reach its operating temperature.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Look well ahead when driving

Remove attached parts Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
following use By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con
sumption and minimizes wear.
133
Driving tips Saving fuel
Use coasting conditions Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac Have maintenance carried out
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv
ice center.
Switch off the engine during Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys
longer stops tem, refer to page 243.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion. ECO PRO
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds. The concept
ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function fuel economy. Engine control and comfort func
tions, such as the climate control system, are
The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve
adjusted accordingly.
hicle automatically switches off the engine dur
ing a stop. Additional information on the Auto In addition, situation-related information can be
matic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to displayed that helps the driver achieve lower fuel
page 56. consumption.
If the engine is stopped and then started again, The resulting range extension can be displayed
fuel consumption and emissions drop com in the instrument cluster.
pared to an engine that runs permanently. Stop
ping the engine even for just a few seconds can Activating ECO PRO
result in savings. Press the button; the LED above the
Use of this system can cause premature wear on button lights up.
certain vehicle components. ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster and
In addition, fuel consumption depends on other DSC is activated if necessary.
factors as well, such as driving style, road con
ditions, maintenance, and environmental fac
tors.
Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
134
Saving fuel Driving tips
Displays in the instrument cluster ECO PRO tip

Situation-related tips that indicate measures to
achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis
played.
A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.
Displaying the ECO PRO tip

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "ECO PRO Tips"
After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus range
are displayed in the instrument cluster. ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel
ECO PRO bonus range economy.
The vehicle's cruising range can be extended by To achieve better fuel economy, the actual tem
adjusting your driving style. perature may vary slightly from the set temper
This extended range can be displayed as a bo ature and the passenger compartment may be
nus range in the instrument cluster. heated or cooled more slowly.
The bonus range is indicated in the range dis
play. Deactivating ECO PRO
The bonus range is automatically reset after re Press the button again.
fueling. The LED above the button and the ECO
PRO display in the instrument cluster go out.
Driving style
ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current
driving style in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving
style.
ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving
style, for example by accelerating less
quickly.
To drive efficiently:
Accelerate less quickly.
Brake in advance.
Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
Automatic transmission: shift from S to D, or
avoid shifting manually.
135
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.

Navigation Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment 2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
well as country-specific and special equipment Information is displayed on the data version.
describes equipment that may not be found in Updating the navigation data
special equipment or the country version. This General information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
tems. be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
General information Depending on the data volume, a data up
The navigation system can determine the pre date may take several hours.
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat Update during the trip to preserve battery.
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
During the update, only the basic functions
guide you to every entered destination.
of the navigation system are available.
Entries in stationary vehicle The status of the update can be viewed.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta After the updating process is complete, the
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable system restarts.
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic
Remove the medium with the navigation
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
data after the update.
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
Performing an update
and other road users in danger. 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
Opening the navigation system 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis
play.
1. Press the button on the controller. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga
2. "Navigation" tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc
troller. tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status

1. Open "Options".
Navigation data
2. "Navigation update"
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
138
Navigation system Navigation
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
139
Navigation Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.
describes equipment that may not be found in Manual destination entry
special equipment or the country version. This General information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys The system supports you in entering street
tems. names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com
parisons, refer to page 24.
At a glance Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options: If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
Enter the destination manually, see below.
city can be skipped.
Select the destination from the address
Destination guidance is started to the town/
book, refer to page 142.
city center if no street is entered.
Last destinations, refer to page 143.
Special destinations, refer to page 143. Entering a state/province
Destination entry via map, refer to
page 145. 1. Press the button.
Using the home address as the destination, 2. "Navigation"
refer to page 143. 3. "Enter address"
Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 146.
Enter the destination via BMW Assist, refer
to page 145.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta 4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable state/province.
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
140
Destination entry Navigation
Entering a town/city 2. Highlight the street.

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis 3. Select the street.
played town/city.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
2. Select letters, if necessary. numbers.
The list is narrowed down further with each
Street does not exist in the destination
entry.
city/town
3. Move the controller to the right.
The desired street does not exist in the specified
4. Select the name of the town/city from the city/town because it belongs to another part of
list. the city/town.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
1. "Navigation"
name:
2. "Enter address"
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
4. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the town/city.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
displayed.
Entering the postal code
All streets of the selected state/province are
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis
offered. The associated town/city is dis
played town/city.
played after the street name.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection

6. Select the letters.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city. 7. Change to the list of street names.
If there are several streets with the same name: 8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
1. Change to the list of street names.
141
Starting destination guidance after Storing the destination in the address

entering the destination book
1. "Accept destination" After entering the destination, store the desti
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another nation in the address book.
destination" 1. "Navigation"
Add, refer to page 147, a destination as a 2. "Map"
further destination.
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
Address book 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Create contacts, refer to page 213.
Selecting a destination from the

address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as des
tinations in the contacts.
If the contacts with addresses from the mo 6. Select an existing contact, if available.
bile phone are not displayed, they first need
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 214. 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position

The current position can be stored in the ad
dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
to contact"
"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
142
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex 2. "Last destinations"

isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last name.
Editing or deleting an address

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry" Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
Using the home address as the
2. "Last destinations"
destination
3. Select the destination.
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 206. 4. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation" Editing the destination

2. "Address book" 1. "Navigation"
3. "Home" 2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. "Start guidance" 4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Last destinations
At a glance
Special destinations
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically. General information
These destinations can be called up and used Even with the latest navigation data, information
as a destination for destination guidance. on specific special destinations may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not be
Calling up the last destination in operation.
1. "Navigation"
143
Opening the search for special "Start search": if a search term is not entered,
destinations the search is repeated with the previous search
Selection of special destinations, such as hotels term.
or tourist attractions.
Category search
1. "Navigation"
1. "Category search"
2. "Points of Interest"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select the search function.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Online Search 4. "Category"
1. "Google Local Search" 5. Select the category.
2. Select a special destination. 6. "Category details"
3. Select the symbol. For some special destinations, multiple cat

egory details can be selected. Move the
4. "Start guidance"
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
A-Z search
7. "Start search"
1. "A-Z search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
2. "Town/City"
8. Select a special destination.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Details are displayed.
4. "Category"
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
5. Select the category.
through the pages.
6. "Category details"
If a phone number is available, a connection
For some special destinations, multiple cat can be established if necessary.
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
7. "Keyword"
Add a destination as a further destination,
8. Enter the keyword.
refer to page 147.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
9. Select a special destination. Display of special destinations
Details are displayed. List of special destinations: special destinations
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf are arranged by distance and appear with a di
through the pages. rectional arrow pointing to the special destina
tion.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary. In the splitscreen, special destinations of the se
lected category are displayed in the map view as
10. Select the symbol. symbols. The display depends on the scale of
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another the map and the category.
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 147.
144
Destination entry via BMW Assist To shift the map diagonally: move the
A connection is established to the Concierge controller in the required direction and
service, refer to page 216. turn it.
1. "Navigation" Specifying the street

2. "Enter address" If the system does not recognize the street, one
3. Open "Options". of the following pieces of information is dis
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry" played:
A street name in the vicinity.
Displaying special destinations in the The county.
map The coordinates of the destination.
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view: Additional functions
1. "Navigation" Additional functions are available on the inter
2. "Map" active map after the controller is pressed.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map

Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation" Select the symbol.
2. "Map" "Start guidance" or "Add as another
The current position of the vehicle is dis destination"
played on the map. Add a destination as a further destination,
3. "Interactive map" refer to page 147.
"Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
"View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
"Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
"Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
"Find points of interest": the search for spe
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
cial destinations is started.
To change the scale: turn the controller.
To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
145
Destination entry by voice Entering a town/city separately

The town/city can be said as a complete word.
General information With the destination entry menu displayed:
Instructions for voice activation system, re
fer to page 25. 1. Press the button on the steering
When making a destination entry by voice, wheel.
you can change between voice operation 2. City or Spell city
and iDrive.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
To have the available spoken instructions town/city.
read out loud: Voice commands.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Saying the entries
The town/city, street, and house number Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit
can be entered using a single command. ies may be suggested.
Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in 5. Select a location:

tersections can be said as whole words or Select a recommended town/city: Yes.
spelled in the language of the system, refer Select a different town/city: New entry.
to page 74.
Select an entry: Entry ..., for instance,
Example: to enter a destination in a US state entry 2.
as a whole word, the system language must
Spell an entry: Spell city.
be English.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the system.
the language of the system differ.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag
name:
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters. Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
The methods of entry depend on the navi
ellipsis.
gation data in use and the country and lan
guage settings. 1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ..., e. g., En
try 2.
Entering the address in a command 2. Select the desired town/city.
1. Press the button on the steering Entering a street or intersection

wheel. separately
2. Enter address Enter a street and intersection in the same way
3. Wait for a request from the system. as you would enter a town/city.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
Entering a house number separately
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system. Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en
If necessary, individually name the separate
tered.
components of the address, e.g., the town/
city. 1. House number
146
2. Say the house number. The intermediate destination is entered in

Say each digit separately. the destination list and is highlighted.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
the system. destination is located at the desired location
in the list.
Starting destination guidance 6. Press the controller.
Start guidance
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en
Planning a trip with tered, highlight the first destination.
intermediate destinations If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
New trip started, the first destination is skipped.
A trip can be planned with several intermediate 2. "Start guidance"
destinations. This symbol marks the active leg of the
1. "Navigation" trip.
2. "Map"
Storing a trip
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
4. "Guidance" necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
5. "Enter new destination" store new trips.
6. Select the type of destination entry. 1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "OK"
Selecting a stored trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
7. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Start guidance"
8. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction
Entering intermediate destinations Intermediate destinations are displayed in re
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can verse order in the list.
be entered for a trip.
1. "Map"
1. "Enter new destination" 2. "Guidance"
2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Open "Options".
3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
4. "Add as another destination"
147
Intermediate destination options

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
"Edit destination"
"Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po
sition in the list.
"Delete dest. in the trip"
"Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Deleting a stored trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Opening the last trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
148
Destination guidance Navigation
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment Route criteria
General information
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also The route calculated can be influenced by
describes equipment that may not be found in selecting certain criteria.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected The route criteria can be changed when the
special equipment or the country version. This destination is entered and during destina
also applies to safety-related functions and sys tion guidance.
tems. Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
Starting destination The recommended route may differ from the
guidance route you would take based on personal ex
perience.
1. "Navigation"
The settings are stored for the remote con
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 140. trol currently in use.
3. "Accept destination" Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
4. "Start guidance" refer to page 155.
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
Changing the route criteria
destination and the estimated time of arrival are 1. "Navigation"
displayed in the map view. 2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
Terminating destination
"Fast route": time-optimized route,
guidance being a combination of the shortest pos
1. "Navigation" sible route and the fastest roads.
2. "Map" "ECO PRO route": optimized com

bination of the fastest and shortest
3. "Guidance"
route.
4. "Stop guidance"
"Short route": short distance, irre
spective of how fast or slow progress will
be.
Continuing destination "Alternative routes": if available, alter
guidance native routes are suggested during ac
If the destination was not reached during the last tive destination guidance.
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
149
Navigation Destination guidance
The individual suggestions are high Street name at the next change in direction.
lighted in color.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
Solid triangle: best lane.
Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying a list of route sections

When destination guidance is active, a list of the
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if route sections can be displayed. The driving dis
necessary: tance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each
"Avoid highways": highways are route section.
avoided wherever possible.
1. "Navigation"
"Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
2. "Route information"
wherever possible.
3. Highlight a route section.
"Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible. The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Route
Bypassing a section of the
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
route
Arrow view. Calculate a new route for a route section.
List of route sections. 1. "Navigation"
Map view, refer to page 151. 2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
Small arrow: indicates the next change in di
rection.
Intersection view. 4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo
meters within which you would like to return
Lane information.
to the original route.
Traffic bulletins.
Distance to the next change in direction.
150
Resuming the original route 3. "Voice instructions"

If the route section should no longer be by
passed: Repeating a spoken instruction
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
3. "New route for:"
4. Press the controller twice.
4. "Remove blocking"
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
Gas station recommendation until the desired volume is set.
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta The setting is stored for the remote control cur
tions along the route are displayed if needed. rently in use.
Even with the latest navigation data, information
on individual special destinations may have Saving the spoken instructions on the
changed; for example, gas stations might not be programmable memory buttons
in operation. The function for switching the spoken instruc
1. "Navigation" tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac
cess.
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station. Map view
The position of the gas station is shown on
the split screen.
Selecting the map view
1. "Navigation"
5. Select the gas station.
2. "Map"
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to At a glance
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur 1 Function bar
rently in use.
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
1. "Navigation" 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
2. "Map" 4 Planned route
151
5 Current location Symbol Function

6 Upper status field Start/end destination guidance.
7 Lower status field
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Lines in the map
Change the route criteria.
Streets and routes are displayed in different col
ors and styles depending on their classification. Search for a special destination.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin Display traffic bulletins.
lines. Open the interactive map.
Traffic obstructions Set the map view.

Small triangles along the planned route indicate Change the scale.
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian
To change to the function bar, move the con
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
troller to the left.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction. Changing the map section
Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the "Interactive map"
planned route or direction.
To shift the map: move the controller in the
Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not required direction.
affect the planned route or direction.
To shift the map diagonally: move the con
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 153. troller in the required direction and turn it.
Planned route Changing the scale

After destination guidance is started, the plan 1. Select the symbol.
ned route is displayed on the map.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Status fields
Automatically scaled map scale
Show/hide: press the controller.
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
Upper status field: time, telephone, and en in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis
tertainment details. played. The entire route between the current lo
Lower status field: symbol for active desti cation and the destination is displayed on the
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, map.
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Settings for the map view
Function bar The settings are stored for the remote control
The following functions are available in the func currently in use.
tion bar:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
152
4. "Settings" "Traffic conditions/gray map"

5. To set the map view: 6. To change the scale: select the split screen
"Day/night mode" and turn the controller.
Select and create the necessary settings

depending on the light conditions.
Traffic bulletins
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded. At a glance
"Satellite images" Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta
Depending on availability and resolution, tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa
satellite images are displayed at scales of tion of a traffic information service. Informa
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
1,000 km. updated continuously.
"Perspective view in 3D" Certain BMW models equipped with navi
Prominent areas that are contained in the gation have the capability to display real-
navigation data are displayed on the map in time traffic information. If your system has
3D. this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
"Traffic conditions/gray map"
An End-User shall no longer have the right
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
bulletins, refer to page 154.
End-User is in material breach of the terms
Symbols for the special destinations are no and conditions contained herein.
longer displayed.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic
Map view for splitscreen
Network) holds the rights to the traffic in
The map view can be selected for the split cident data and RDS-TMC network through
screen independently from the main screen. which it is delivered. You may not modify,
1. Open "Options". copy, scan or use any other method to re
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
2. "Split screen"
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
until the split screen is selected. and hold harmless BMW of North America,
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Net
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
5. Select the map view.
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
"Arrow display" expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
"Map facing north" of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in
"Map direction of travel" cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
"Map view with perspective"
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
"Position" connection herewith.
"Exit ramp view": selected blind drive B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor
ways are displayed three dimensionally. mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
153
content, traffic and road conditions, route Switching the reception on/off
usability, or speed. 1. "Navigation"
C. The licensed material is provided to li 2. Open "Options".
censee as is, and where is. Total Traffic
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
Opening the list of traffic bulletins
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties 1. "Navigation"
or representations with respect to the li 2. "Map"
censed material (including, without limita 3. "Traffic Info"
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im are displayed.
plied or statutory, including, without limita The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta tance from the current position of the vehi
bility, non-infringement fitness for a cle.
particular purpose, or those arising from a 4. Select a traffic bulletin.
course of dealing or usage of trade.
"More information": display additional
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or information.
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci
if required.
dental damages (including, without limita
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
Traffic bulletins on the map
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net The Control Display changes to a black and
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the white display. This enables a better view of the
possibility of such damages. These limita traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre
tions apply to all claims, including, without garded in this setting. Symbols and special des
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such tinations are not displayed.
as negligence, product liability and strict li
1. "Navigation"
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen 2. "Map"
tial damages, so those particular limitations 3. Open "Options".
may not apply to you. 4. "Settings"
The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
by symbols.
The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area Symbols in the map view
are stored in a list. Depending on the scale of the map and the lo
The symbol in the function bar of the map cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis
that affect the calculated route. played.
154
Additional information in the map view Destination guidance with traffic

Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc bulletins
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the General information
calculated route. Detour suggestions from the navigation system
Red: traffic congestion can be manually accepted when using semi-dy
namic destination guidance. When using dy
Orange: stop-and-go traffic
namic destination guidance, they are automati
Yellow: heavy traffic cally accepted for route guidance.
Green: clear roads
Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road Semi-dynamic destination guidance
construction When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
The displayed information depends on the par semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
ticular traffic information service. The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes
Filtering traffic bulletins sage is displayed depending on the route, the
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
map. If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
1. "Navigation" The upper part of the message shows:
2. "Map" Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos
3. Open "Options". sibly with the distance to the beginning of
4. "Traffic Info categories" the obstruction.
5. Select the desired category. Total length of the traffic obstructions on the
route.
Time by which the trip is extended due to the
traffic obstructions.
The lower part of the message shows:
Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.
Time gained if the detour is taken compared
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis to the original route with the traffic obstruc
played on the map. tions.
Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route Both the original route, shown in white, and the
are always shown. detour are displayed on the split screen.
For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no
tify you of potentially dangerous situations, Accepting the detour
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid "Detour"
den.
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de
tour suggestion.
155
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes

sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance

The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
The system does not point out traffic ob
structions along the original route.
Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu
lated route may lead through the traffic ob
struction.
Dangerous situations are displayed regard
less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance

1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
156
What to do if... Navigation
What to do if...
Vehicle equipment Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec
This chapter describes all series equipment as tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal
culate a new route suggestion.
tems.
What to do if...
The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined. Input any street in the se
lected city and start destination guidance.
The destination is not used for route guid
ance?
The destination data are not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
Letters for destination input cannot be se
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as close
as possible to the original.
Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
157
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.

Entertainment Tone
Tone
Vehicle equipment 3. Select the desired tone settings.

tems.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.

General information 5. To store: press the controller.
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader Adjusting the equalizer
"Treble": treble adjustment. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
"Bass": depth adjustment. 2. "Tone"
"Balance": left/right volume distribution. 3. "Equalizer"
"Fader": front/rear volume distribution. 4. Select the desired setting.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"

6. To store: press the controller.
160
Tone Entertainment
Multi-channel playback, Adjusting the volume

surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play
back, surround. 3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

Resetting the tone settings

When surround is activated, multi-channel play All tone settings can be reset to the default set
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is ting.
played.
2. "Tone"
Volume 3. "Reset"
"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
"Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en
tertainment sound output.
"Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
161
Entertainment Radio
Radio
Vehicle equipment AM/FM station
Selecting a station
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also 1. "Radio"
describes equipment that may not be found in 2. "FM" or "AM"
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 3. Select the desired station.
tems.
Controls
All saved stations are stored for the remote con

trol currently in use.
Changing the station

Turn the controller and press it
1 Volume, on/off or
2 Change wave band Press the button

3 Change entertainment sources
or
4 Change station/track
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
5 Programmable memory buttons
page 12.
Storing a station
Sound output 1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
162
Radio Entertainment
3. Highlight the desired station. 4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to be
displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list of
current stations and stored stations.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location. Switching the RDS on/off
The stations are stored for the remote control 1. "Radio"
currently in use. 2. "FM"
The stations can also be stored on the program 3. Open "Options".
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
4. "RDS"
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.

rently in use.
HD Radio reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
To store the station: press the controller for an HD Radio technology manufactured under li
extended period. cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For
eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD
Renaming a station Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq
uity Digital Corp.
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
1. "Radio" reception
2. "FM" 1. "Radio"
3. Select the desired station. 2. "FM" or "AM"
163
Entertainment Radio
3. Open "Options". Navigation bar overview

4. "HD Radio Reception"
Symbol Function
rently in use. Change the list view.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
Select the category.
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it Direct channel entry
may take several seconds for the station to be Timeshift
played back in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously Open the My Favorites category/
received in digital mode, the playback switches open a favorite.
between analog and digital reception. In this Manage the favorites.
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Traffic Jump
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
on the current track, such as the name of the ar also be stored on the programmable memory
tist. buttons, refer to page 23.
1. Select the desired station. Managing a subscription

2. Open "Options". To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
3. "Station info" channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
Selecting a substation of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
This symbol indicates that a main station also status line.
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station Enabling channels
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc. The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller. 1. "Radio"
3. Select the substation. 2. "Satellite radio"
When reception is poor, the substation is muted. 3. "Category"
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele
phone.
164
Radio Entertainment
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate Via the iDrive

gory. 1. "Radio"
5. Select the desired channel. 2. "Satellite radio"
The phone number and an electronic serial 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate
number, ESN, are displayed. gory.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan 4. Select the desired channel.
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again Via the button on the radio
via this phone number.
Press the button.
Unsubscribing from channels The next channel is selected.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Via direct channel entry
3. Open "Options". 1. "Radio"
4. "Manage subscription" 2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
sired category.
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
4. Select the desired channel.
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
165
Entertainment Radio
6. Press the controller again to confirm the is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf
highlighted channel. fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Opening the timeshift function

1. "Radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
7. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
The red arrow shows the current playback
Changing the list view position.
The list view changes every time the first symbol The time difference to the live broadcast is
on the navigation bar is pressed. displayed next to the buffer bar.
Information on the channel is displayed. For live transmissions "live".
Symbol Meaning
Timeshift menu
Channel name
Artist Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast

Track
Playback/pause
Selecting a category Next track
1. "Radio"
Previous track
3. "Category" Fast forward
4. Select the desired category. Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac

Timeshift
tivated
Approx. one hour of the program being broad
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must Automatic timeshift
be available. When the function is activated, audio playback
The stored audio track can be played with a de is stopped automatically in the event of:
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
Activation of the voice activation system.
166
Radio Entertainment
Muting. 4. "Add sports information"

The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
5. Select the league.
"Automatic time shift"
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Storing favorites
Opening the favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, If an activated favorite is played back, the fol
league, and team. lowing message appears for approx. 20 seconds
"Favorite alert!".
Storing the artist, track, or game "Favorites"
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur Select the symbol while the message is shown.
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1. "Radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game. The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
Storing the league or team the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites being broadcast can be selected from a list.
from a selection list.
Managing the favorites
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Activating/deactivating the favorites
3. "Manage favorites" Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor
ites.
167
Entertainment Radio
The setting is stored for the remote control cur Automatic update
rently in use. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
Deleting favorites takes place automatically and may take several
1. "Satellite radio" minutes.
2. "Manage favorites"
Notes
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
Reception may not be available in some sit
4. Open "Options".
uations, such as under certain environmen
5. "Delete entry" tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
Traffic Jump The signal may not be available in tunnels or
Traffic and weather information for a selected underground garages; next to tall buildings;
region is broadcast every few minutes. or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Stored stations
3. Open "Options".
General information
4. "Set jump"
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur Calling up a station
rently in use. 1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Storing a station
3. "Jump to:" The station currently selected is stored.
Information for the selected region is broadcast
1. "Radio"
as soon as it is available.
2. "Presets"
A new panel opens.
3. "Store station"
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad

cast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic

Jump.
4. Select the desired memory location.
168
Radio Entertainment
The list of stored stations is stored for the re

mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
169
Entertainment CD/multimedia
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment CD/DVD
Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
special equipment or the country version. This Playback begins automatically.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys Reading can take a few minutes with com
tems. pressed audio files.
Starting playback
Controls A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or a
CD is located in the CD changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change the entertainment source
5 Change station/track
6 Programmable memory buttons Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
... CD changer
Sound output
Switching on/off Playable formats
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
button on the radio. RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video.
Muting CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the M4A.
radio.
170
CD/multimedia Entertainment
Audio playback 2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Selecting the track using the button

Press the button for the appropriate di
rection as often as necessary until the
desired track is played back.
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
Displaying information on the track
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
Depending on the data, some letters and num
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor Interpret.
rectly. Album track.
1. Select the directory if necessary. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
To change to a higher level directory: move File name of track.

the controller to the left.
Random playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
171
4. Open "Options". Playback

5. "Random" The video image is displayed on the Control Dis
play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
some countries, it is only displayed while the
handbrake is set or the automatic transmission
is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all 4. "DVD menu"
tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

Video playback
VCD/SVCD
Country codes
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on 2. "CD/DVD"
the DVD. 3. Select a CD with video content.
Code Region 4. "Select track"

5. Select the desired track.
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af Video menu

rica To open the video menu: turn the controller dur
ing playback.
3 Southeast Asia
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand Symbol Function
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa Open DVD menu
6 China Starting playback
0 All regions Pause
Stop
172
Symbol Function 3. "Audio/language"
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev

ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback. 4. Select the desired language.
DVD menu Selecting the subtitles

1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the The subtitles that are available depend on the
video menu. DVD.
2. "DVD menu" 1. Turn the controller during playback.
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de 2. Open "Options".
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. "Subtitles"
3. To select menu items: move the controller
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
and press it.
display subtitles".
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language

The languages that are available depend on the
DVD. Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1. Turn the controller during playback. 1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
173
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color" Selecting the camera angle

The availability of a different camera angle de
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting Opening the main menu, back
is reached and press the controller. These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
Selecting the zoom use.
Display the video image on the entire screen.
CD changer
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
4. "Zoom mode"
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located un

der a cover in the side trim on the left side of the
cargo area.
Removing the CD magazine

Selecting a track
To fill or empty the CD magazine, remove it from
DVD video:
the CD changer:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
4. "Select title"
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
1. Push the cover aside, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
174
The CD magazine is ejected. Notes

Wait at least 2 seconds before sliding the mag
azine back in to ensure that the inserted CDs can CD/DVD player and changer
be read in. Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
Filling/emptying the CD magazine officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.
CDs and DVDs

Use of CDs/DVDs
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar
When filling or emptying the CD magazine, only
able damage to the device.
touch the CDs at the edge; do not touch the re
flective scanning surface. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
Filling:
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
Insert one CD per compartment with the printed otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
side up. and no longer eject.
Emptying: Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD. Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.
Inserting the CD magazine
General malfunctions
CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
Push in the CD magazine all the way in the di
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
rection of the arrow, arrow 1, and close the
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
cover, arrow 2.
temporarily prevent playback.
The CD changer automatically reads in the in
serted CDs and is then ready for operation.
175
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ patents granted and registered in the USA and
DVDs worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All
causes: rights reserved.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- Music collection
recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data
creation or recording processes, or poor Storing music
quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
General information
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
a pen intended for this purpose.
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
Damage
Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
pressed audio format. If available, informa
moisture.
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. stored as well.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
sunlight. or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
CDs/DVDs with copy protection formats are stored. Individual tracks and di
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can track and directory, refer to page 180.
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
can only be played to a limited extent. stored but cannot be played back.
MACROVISION Backing up music data

This product contains copyrighted technology Regularly back up the music data; other
that is based on multiple registered US patents wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision disc.
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use Music recognition technology and re
of this copy protection must be approved by lated data are provided by Gracenote.
Macrovision. Media protected by this product - Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may ognition technology and related content deliv
only be used for private purposes. Copying of ery. For more information, please visit
this technology is prohibited. www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
DTS Digital Surround
copyright 2000-2011 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright 2000-2011 Gracenote.
Manufactured under license under U.S.
This product and service may practice one or
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
176
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, 3. "Storing..."

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD

1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin
The music collection is displayed and the first ning of the track at which storage was inter
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the rupted.
storage process, the tracks are played in se
quence. Album information
Observe the following during the storage proc During storage, information such as the name of
ess: the artist is stored with the track, if this informa
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as CD.
this will interrupt the storage process. You can To update the database, contact your service
switch to the other audio sources without inter center.
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored Storing from a USB device
can be called up.
To store music, a suitable device must be con
nected to the USB interface in the glove com
Interrupting storage
partment.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi
2. "CD/DVD" ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
177
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the 3. "Music search"

USB audio interface in the center armrest.
File systems: standard file systems for USB
devices are supported. The FAT 32 format
is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 120.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Select the desired category.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
5. Select the desired entry.

Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
and input the desired entry.
Playing music Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish.
Music search The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
All tracks for which additional information has order.
been stored can be accessed by the music Not all categories need to be selected. For
search. Tracks without additional information example, to search for all tracks by a certain
can be called up via the corresponding album, artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
refer to page 179. by that artist are then displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 7. "Start play"
2. "Music collection" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search

"New search"
178
Music search by voice Albums

Instructions for voice activation system, refer to All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
page 25. dates.
Symbol Format
wheel. Audio CD
2. Music search Compressed audio files
3. Open the desired category, e. g., Select
artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
3. Select the desired album.
To select a track directly: Title ...
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
Say the voice command and the name of the subdirectories of the album are displayed.
desired track in a single command. The first track is played automatically, if pos
sible.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Current playback"
4. Change directories if needed to select

tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran
dom order.
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Top 50 2. "Music collection"
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
179
3. Open "Options". Deleting an album

4. "Random" An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory

A track cannot be deleted while it is being
Managing music played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
Albums
that directory is being played.
Renaming an album 1. "CD/Multimedia"
The name of the album, if available, is automat 2. "Music collection"
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
3. Highlight the directory or track.
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired. 4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" Free memory capacity
3. Highlight the desired album. Display the free memory capacity in the music
4. Open "Options". collection.
5. "Rename album" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection

The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
6. Select the letters individually. memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
180
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur Deleting the music collection
ing a long trip. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Starting the engine. 2. "Music collection"
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter 3. Open "Options".
face in the glove compartment, refer to 4. "Delete music collection"
page 120.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection" External devices
5. Open "Options".
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
7. "Backup music on USB"
At a glance
For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
5. "Restore music from USB"
The AUX-IN port is in the center console.
181
Connect the headphone connector or line-out Connectors for external devices

connector of the device to the AUX-IN port. Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play
Playback ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and are supported by the USB audio interface.
select a track on the audio device. Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
2. "CD/Multimedia" page 202, when equipped with the music
3. If necessary, "External devices" interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
4. "AUX front"
Playback is only possible if no audio device
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Volume Due to the large number of different audio devi

ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
The volume of the sound output is dependent
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark
ble on the vehicle.
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes. Ask your service center about suitable audio de
vices/mobile phones.
Adjusting the volume
Audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Standard audio files can be played back:
2. If necessary, "External devices"
MP3.
3. "AUX front"
WMA.
4. "Volume"
WAV (PCM).
AAC, M4A.
Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are sup
ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.
Connecting
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/music interface for

smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers. The USB audio interface is in the center console.
182
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB 3. Select the or symbol.

audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB

audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect The playback starts with the first track.
the USB audio interface and the USB device The CD cover belonging to the track may appear
against physical damage. on the Control Display after several seconds.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
Track search
After connecting for the first time Selection is possible via:
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type Playback lists.
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit Information: type of music, artist, and, if
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, available, composer, album, track.
depending on the USB device and the number
Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
of tracks.
composer.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
via the file directory.
the Latin alphabet.
Number of tracks
Starting the track search
Information from up to four USB devices or for
1. "CD/Multimedia"
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 2. "External devices"
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist 3. Select the or symbol.
ing tracks may be deleted. 4. "Search"
Copy protection 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or

"Artist".
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man
agement (DRM) cannot be played. All entries are displayed in a list.
Open "A-Z search" and input the de
Playback sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
1. "CD/Multimedia" results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
2. "External devices" all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
183
Select the desired entry from the list. 3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
At a glance
6. Select other categories if you wish. Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible.
Not all categories need to be selected. For They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis Playback
played. The video image is displayed on the front Con
7. "Start play" trol Display up to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only dis
Restarting a track search played if the handbrake is set or if the automatic
transmission is in position P.
"New search"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Playback lists 2. "External devices"
Calling up playback lists. 3. Select the symbol.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Video"
2. "External devices" 5. Select the directory if necessary.
3. Select the or symbol. To go up a level in the directory: move the
4. "Playlists" controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play
Current playback back.
List of tracks currently being played.
Video menu
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" Symbol Function
3. Select the or symbol. Next video file
4. "Current playback"
Previous video file
Random playback Double-click on an icon to play back
The current list of tracks is played back in ran previous video file.
dom order.
Notes
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en
2. "External devices"
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem
184
peratures; refer to the audio device operating The ignition is switched on.
instructions. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
Depending on the configuration of the audio page 193, and on the device.
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
files may not play back correctly in each case. device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
Information on connection operating instructions.
The connected audio device is supplied with A number with at least four and a maximum
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass
device. Therefore, do not additionally con key. It is only required once for pairing.
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised. Pairing and connecting
Do not use force when plugging the con
Pairing a device
nector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi
lamps to the USB audio interface.
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
Do not connect USB hard drives. pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.
Do not use the USB audio interface to re
1. "CD/Multimedia"
charge external devices.
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
Bluetooth audio 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. "Add new phone"
At a glance
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis
Music files on external devices such as audio played.
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 194.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The sound is output on the vehicle loud
speakers.
The volume of the sound output is depend
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the 5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
volume on the device. to the device operating instructions: for in
Up to four external devices can be paired stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
with the vehicle. device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
Requirements on the device display.
The device is suitable. Information at 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. the device display.
The device is ready for operation.
185
You are prompted by the iDrive or device to Requirements

enter the same Bluetooth passkey. If necessary, activate the audio connection of
7. Enter the passkey and confirm. the desired device from the list of paired devi
ces.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
8. Select the desired functions with which the 7. Activate "Audio".
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio". 8. "OK"
9. "OK" Connecting the device

1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed

as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 187.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
Connecting a specific device source.
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source. Playback
Connecting is not possible when data is ex General information
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue
tooth. The display of music track information de
pends on the device.
Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
186
Playback is interrupted when data is ex Unpairing a device

changed via a mobile phone connected via 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Bluetooth.
Starting playback 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
1. Connect the device. 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
2. "CD/Multimedia" 5. Open "Options".
3. "External devices" 6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec
Information on suitable devices can be found at
essary.
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Playback menu Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 192.
Depending on the particular device, some of the The device is not supported by the vehicle.
functions may not be available. Perform a software update, refer to
page 188, if needed.
Symbol Function
The device could not be paired or connected.
Next track
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
Fast forward: press and hold the and the vehicle match? Enter the same
symbol. passkey on the device and via iDrive.
Previous music track Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Reverse: press and hold the symbol. the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
Disconnecting the audio connection
with other devices if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
2. "Bluetooth (audio)" does it have only a limited remaining battery
3. Highlight the desired device. life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
4. Open "Options". in adapter or via a charging cable.
5. "Configure phone" Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi

ble that only one device can be connected
6. "Audio"
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
7. "OK"
187
from the vehicle and pair and connect only Displaying the current version
one device. The currently installed software is displayed.
The device no longer reacts? Switch the de
1. "Settings"
vice off and on again.
2. "Software update"
Repeat the pairing procedure.
3. "Show current version"
Music cannot be played back.
Select desired version to display additional in
Start the program for playing back music
formation.
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
Updating software via USB
Switch the radio on and off again.
The software may only be updated when the ve
Music files can only be played back softly. hicle is stationary.
Adjust the volume settings on the device.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed main director of a USB flash drive.
or by other messages on the device.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB audio
Switch off the button tones and other signal interface in the center console. An update
tones on the device. via the USB interface in the glove compart
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or ment is not possible.
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. 3. "Settings"
Switch the radio on and off again. 4. "Software update"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is 5. "Update software"
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 187, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
6. "Start update"
Software Update
7. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With All listed software updates are installed.
a software update, the vehicle can support new
mobile phones or new external device, for ex Restoring the previous version
ample. The software version prior to the last software
USB. update can be restored.
Software updates and related current infor The previous version can only be restored when
mation is available at www.bmw.com/up the vehicle is stationary.
date. 1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
188
3. "Restore previous version"

4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
189
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.

Communication Telephone
Telephone
Vehicle equipment Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
well as country-specific and special equipment Hold the mobile phone.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also Recharge the battery.
describes equipment that may not be found in Connect the mobile phone to an outside an
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
tems.
Approved mobile phones

At a glance Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup
The concept ported by the mobile phone preparation pack
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
tooth.
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue number and software part number
tooth SIG, Inc.
The vehicle identification number and software
After these devices are paired once, they are part number are needed to determine which mo
recognized automatically when the ignition is bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle preparation package. The software version of
and can then be operated via iDrive, the buttons the mobile phone may also be required.
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
1. "Telephone"
Depending on their functionality, external devi
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone 2. Open "Options".
or as an audio source. The telephone functions 3. "Bluetooth info"
are described in the following. Operating the au 4. "Display system information"
dio functions, refer to page 185.
These approved mobile phones with a certain
Up to four external devices can be paired. software version, support the vehicle functions
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the described below.
mobile phone provider or service provider. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
Using the mobile phone while driving phones or software versions.
Make entries only when traffic and road Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
in your hand while you are driving; use the this may lead to a malfunction.
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob A software update, refer to page 188, can be
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve performed if necessary.
hicle occupants and other road users.
192
Telephone Communication
Notes 2. Open "Options".

At high temperatures, the charging function of 3. "Bluetooth"
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile

phone
General information Additional functions
The following functions are available:
Activating/deactivating the additional
Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
functions
Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele Activate the functions before pairing to be able
phone. to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. able mobile phones, refer to page 192, that sup
Use of an audio device as an audio source, port this function.
refer to page 185. 1. "Telephone"
Requirements 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
The mobile phone is suitable, refer to 3. Open "Options".

page 192. 4. "Configure Bluetooth"
The mobile phone is ready for operation. 5. Select the desired additional function.
Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on "Additional telephone"
the mobile phone. "Office"
Bluetooth presettings may need to be made "Bluetooth audio"
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
6. "OK"
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions. An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
A number with at least four and a maximum Additional telephone
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
A mobile phone can be used as an additional te
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
lephone.
The ignition is switched on.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 196. While a call is
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
active on the additional telephone, received
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply calls are displayed on the Control Display.
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
193
Audio source Gray symbol: the function is inactive.

A mobile phone can be used as an audio source. Symbol Function
Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Telephone.
Pairing the mobile phone Additional telephone.

To avoid becoming distracted and posing Audio source.
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve
tionary. hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con
nected with the vehicle at once.
1. "Telephone" If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
2. "Bluetooth (phone)" to page 195.
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis
Following the initial pairing
played. The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
when the engine is running or the ignition is
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
switched on.
instructions: for instance, search for or con
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
on the mobile phone display.
depending on the mobile phone.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
Four mobile phones can be paired.
the mobile phone display.
Specific settings may be necessary in some
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
Enter the passkey and confirm.
operating instructions.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle Connecting a particular mobile phone
display with the control number on the mo 1. "Telephone"
bile phone display. Confirm the control num
2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
ber on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con
"OK"
nected.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
The functions assigned to the mobile phone be
phone is to be used.
fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
8. "OK" when it is reconnected. These functions are de
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone activated in a mobile phone that is already con
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. nected.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
194
Configuring the mobile phone 4. Open "Options".

Additional functions can be activated or deacti 5. "Remove phone from list"
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
"Telephone"
What to do if...
"Additional telephone" Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
"Audio" page 192.
7. "OK" The mobile phone could not be paired or con
If a function has already been assigned to an nected.
other connected mobile phone, the function is Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mobile the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
phone is unpaired when the function is assigned vehicle and on the mobile phone.
to a new mobile phone. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
Swapping the telephone and additional same passkey on the mobile phone and via
telephone iDrive.
The function of the telephone and additional te Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
lephone can be swapped automatically. the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
1. "Telephone" Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
2. "Bluetooth (phone)" to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con
nections with other devices if necessary.
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Is the audio connection activated? Deacti
Unpairing the mobile phone vate the audio connection.
1. "Telephone" Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un in adapter or via the charging cable.
paired.
Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi
ble that only one mobile phone can be con
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and
connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
195
Is the ambient temperature too high or low? Controls

Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme
environmental conditions. Adjusting the volume
The telephone functions are not available.
Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone book
entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete. Turn the knob until the desired volume is se
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con
It is possible that only the phone book en
trol currently in use.
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
It may not be possible to display phone book the microphone on the telephone and the vol
entries with special characters. ume of the called party. Depending on the mo
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad
The number of phone book entries to be
justed. The settings can only be created during
stored is too high.
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
Is the data volume of the contact too large, telephone. The settings are deleted when the
e. g., due to stored information such as telephone is unpaired.
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con
tact. 1. "Settings"
Is the mobile phone connected as an audio 2. "Tone"
source or additional telephone? The mobile 3. "Volume settings"
phone must be connected as a telephone.
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
The phone connection quality is poor. "Loudspeak."
The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in Incoming call
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console. Receiving calls
Adjust the volume of the microphone and If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
loudspeakers separately. book and is transmitted by the network, the
If all points in this list have been checked and the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
required function is still not available, contact only the phone number is displayed.
Customer Relations or the service center. If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis
played.
196
For calls on the additional telephone, the num Entering a phone number
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network. Dialing a number
An incoming call to one of the telephones is au 1. "Telephone"
tomatically rejected if there is an active call on 2. "Dial number"
the other telephone.
3. Select the digits individually.
Accepting a call 4. Select the symbol.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
"Accept"
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
Rejecting a call calls to a single conference call. These functions
"Reject" must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel. Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
or This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
1. "Telephone" adjusted accordingly.
2. "End call" If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call

Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
197
The existing call is put on hold. DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac
cess to network services or for controlling devi
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list. 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
"Return"
Phone book
The call on hold is resumed.
Displays
Switching between two calls, hold call
The phone book accesses the contacts and
The active call is displayed in color. shows all contacts for which a phone number
The call on hold is displayed in gray. has been stored. The entries can be selected to
"Swap calls" make a call.
The call on hold is resumed. 1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"
Establishing a conference call
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
Two calls can be connected to a single tele contacts.
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute

When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
When a new connection is established.
When switching between call parties.
198
Calling a contact Dialing the number via the iDrive

1. "Telephone"
Symbol Meaning
2. "Redial"
Contact with one stored phone num
ber.
Contact with more than one stored

phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with

out reception or network, or Service
Request is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se 3. Select the desired entry and the phone num
lect the required contact. The connection is be ber if necessary.
ing established.
The connection is established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the Deleting a single entry or all entries
phone number. The connection is being estab
The deletion of entries depends on your partic
lished.
ular mobile phone.
Editing a contact 1. Highlight the entry.
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a 2. Open "Options".
contact is changed, the changes are not stored 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle. Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the contact. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry" 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
The contact can be edited. contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
Redialing 5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
General information
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
7. "Store contact"
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. Received calls
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed. Displaying calls
The sorting order of the phone numbers de
The 20 calls that were last received are dis
pends on the particular mobile phone.
played.
1. "Telephone"
199
2. "Received calls" From the mobile phone to the hands-

free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
Calling a number from the list instructions.
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established. From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Deleting a single entry or all entries Calls that are made on the hands-free system
The deletion of entries depends on your partic can in some cases be continued on the mobile
ular mobile phone. phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
2. Open "Options". instructions.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts Voice operation

General information
2. Open "Options".
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
tem: operation, refer to page 25.
contact"
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
4. Select the contact if necessary.
system: depending on the equipment, the mo
5. Select the type of number: "Home", bile phone can be voice operated as described
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" below.
6. Complete the entries if necessary. The list of short commands in the Owner's
7. "Store contact" Manual does not apply to this type of voice op
eration.
Hands-free system
The concept
General information The mobile phone can be operated without
Calls that are being made on the hands-free taking your hands from the steering wheel.
system can be continued on the mobile phone In many cases, the entries are accompanied
and vice versa. by announcements or questions.
... Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.
200
... Identifies the answers generated by the The system says: Dialing number.
voice operation system.
Calling
Using voice activation
Dialing a phone number
Activating the voice activation system 1. Dial number
2. Say the phone number.
wheel. 3. Dial
2. Say the command.
Correcting the phone number
Terminating the voice activation The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system system has repeated the digits.
Correct number
Press the button on the steering wheel
or Cancel. The command can be repeated as often as nec
essary.
Possible commands Deleting a phone number

Having possible commands read aloud Delete
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Help. Redialing
Possible commands are announced. Redial
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
Voice phone book
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry. Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
Using alternative commands phone book.
The system often recognizes a number of dif The entries must be entered using voice activa
ferent commands to run a function; for instance: tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Dial name or Name
Saving an entry
Example: dialing a phone number
1. Save name
1. Press the button on the steering 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
wheel. duration of approx. 2 seconds.
2. Dial number 3. Say the phone number after being prompted
The system says: Please say the number. to do so by the system.
3. For instance, 123 456 790 4. Save
The system says: 123 456 790. Continue?

Deleting an entry
.
1. Delete name
4. Dial
201
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. Environmental conditions

3. Confirm the prompt: Yes Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha
Deleting all entries sis, and speed.
1. Delete phone book Always say commands in the language of
2. Confirm the prompt: Yes the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
3. Confirm the prompt again: Yes
be changed in the Control Display.
Reading and selecting entries Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
1. Read phonebook
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
2. When the desired entry is read aloud:
while speaking.
say Dial number
Selecting an entry
Snap-in adapter
1. Dial name
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. General information
3. Confirm the prompt: Yes More information on compatible snap-in adapt
ers that support the functions of the mobile
Adjusting the volume phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Turn the knob during an announcement. Installation position

In the center armrest.
The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
The volume is stored for the remote control 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer
gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice
and vocal pitch can change. This can unneces
sarily delay the establishment of a telephone
connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
202
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar Removing the mobile phone
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en
gages.
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but

ton 1.
Inserting the mobile phone

1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts and
press it down until it engages.
The battery is charged beginning with the radio

ready state of the vehicle.
203
Communication Office
Office
Vehicle equipment The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 72, are correctly set on the Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as Display and on the mobile phone, for in
well as country-specific and special equipment stance to correctly display appointments.
Office is activated, refer to page 193.
Updating
also applies to safety-related functions and sys Data are updated every time the mobile phone
tems. is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
At a glance 1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
General information "Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes
3. Open "Options".
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile 4. "Update data"
phone provides compatible support of these Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stan vehicle.
dards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at Office information
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
The number of unread messages and active
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
fice.
displayed.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary. 1. "Office"
The mobile phone has read-access only. 2. "Current office"

3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Do not use Office while driving
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf
fic and road conditions allow this.
Requirements
A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
204
Office Communication
Contacts Dialing phone numbers

1. Select the desired contact.
Note 2. Select the phone number.
Equipment version with the mobile phone prep The connection is established.
aration package.
Editing a contact
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con
2. "Edit contact"
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers
can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" 3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination
2. Select the address.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De
When contacts from the mobile phone are
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
used, the address may need to be matched
search is offered, refer to page 23.
to the navigation data contained in the vehi
A symbol indicates the storage location of the cle. In this case:
contacts.
Correct the address.
Symbol Storage location 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
No sym In the vehicle; the address has not
bol been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
In the vehicle; the address has An address that is to be used for destination
been checked as a destination. guidance must match the navigation data con
Mobile phone.
205
tained in the vehicle. The address can be If necessary, "Accept address".

checked for this purpose. 9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address. Contact types
2. Open "Options". Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary. Symbol Meaning
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of Home phone number.

it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
Business phone number.
changed on the mobile phone.
Mobile phone number.
New contact
Other phone number.
General information Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter Business address.
net address.
1. "Office"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
2. "Contacts"
top of the contact list.
3. Open "Options".
1. "Office"
4. "New contact"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
Selecting the sorting order of the

names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ 1. "Office"
ous entries: "Delete input fields" 2. "Contacts"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next 3. Open "Options".
to the entry field. 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. last name"
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation Depending on how the contacts were stored on
system: enter the address. Only addresses the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
contained in the navigation data in the vehi may differ from the selected sorting order.
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti
nation guidance is possible for all ad
dresses.
206
Show contact pictures Displaying messages

Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in 1. "Office"
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected 2. "Messages"
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic
A symbol identifies the type of message.
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function. Symbol Message type
1. "Office" Text messages.
2. "Contacts"
My Info
3. Open "Options".
Message from the Concierge serv
4. "Configure Bluetooth"
ice.
5. "Show images"
E-mail from mobile phone.
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de
activated.
Filtering the message list
Deleting contacts The message list can be filtered if more than one
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are type of message exists.
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can
1. "Filter:"
not be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"
2. Select the type of message.

Messages "All"
General information All messages are displayed.
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from "E-mail"
the mobile phone are displayed depends on Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
whether transmission from the mobile phone to displayed.
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- "Service message"
mails may not be supported by the service pro
vider, or the function may need to be enabled Only messages from the BMW Assist
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, Concierge service and My Info are dis
transmission may take several minutes. Mes played.
sages are only displayed in full length when the "Text message"
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi Only text messages from the mobile
tional telephone are not transmitted. phone are displayed.
207
Deleting messages My Info

Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted. Selecting additional functions
Delete a message: Additional functions are available when a mes
sage is selected.
1. "Office"
Symbol Function
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message" "Call"
Delete all messages: If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
1. "Office"
"Select phone number"
2. "Messages"
If the message contains more than
3. Open "Options".
one number, select the desired num
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service ber from the list. The connection is
messages" established.
Text messages
Message from the Concierge service
Calling the sender of a text message
Storing an address
1. Select the desired message.
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
Saving the sender in the contacts 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Highlight the desired message.
Selecting additional functions
2. Open "Options".
Additional functions are available when a mes
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
sage is selected.
contact"
Symbol Function
Using contact data
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text destination"
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211. "Call"
If the message contains a number,
Reading the text message out loud the connection is established.
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 211.
208
Symbol Function Only a part of the email from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than Reading the e-mail out loud
one number, select the desired num Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 211.
ber from the list. The connection is
established.
"Further information" Calendar

Display additional information.
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
E-mail next 50 days can be displayed.
Displaying e-mails 1. "Office"

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"
2. "Messages" The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Selecting the calendar day

Displaying e-mail contacts
1. Select the date.
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
2. Select the desired day or date.

Using contact data
"Next day"
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or "Date:"
selected, refer to page 211. "Previous day"
"Today"
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- Display the appointment
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may 1. Select the desired appointment.
result in charges.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces
1. "Office" sary:
2. "Messages" Turn the controller.
3. Open "Options". Select the symbol.
4. "Fully download e-mails"
209
Using contact data Using contact data

Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211. selected, refer to page 211.
Reading the appointment out loud Reading the task out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to Read the task out loud, refer to page 211.
page 211.
Notes
Tasks
Displaying notes
Displaying the task list 1. "Office"
Display tasks that are due within the next 2. "Notes"
90 days.
All notes are displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks" Displaying the note
1. Select the desired note.
Sorting the task list
1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:

Turn the controller.
2. Select the sorting criterion: Select the symbol.
"Priority (!)"
"Subject" Using contact data
"Due date" Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
Displaying the task selected, refer to page 211.
1. Select the desired task.

Reading the note out loud
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
Read the note out loud, refer to page 211.
Turn the controller.
Select the symbol.
210
Reminders Reading out loud

Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
Displaying reminders
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a 1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed. task, or note.
1. "Office"
The following options are available during read
2. "Reminders"
ing:
3. Select the desired reminder.
"Pause"
The corresponding appointment or the task are
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
displayed.
reading.
"Back to beginning"
Using contact data Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
At a glance Select the symbol.
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Go back one paragraph.
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
Select the symbol.
selected.
Skip a paragraph.
Displaying contact or selecting phone To end reading, turn the controller to the left.
number
1. "Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone What to do if...
number: Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
Select the contact to display contact de page 192.
tails. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
Select the phone number to establish a e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis
connection directly. played.
The mobile phone is not capable of the
Storing contact data missing function or is not connected cor
1. "Use contact data" rectly.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad The Office function is deactivated.
dress. The mobile phone is connected as an addi
3. Open "Options". tional phone.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new Appointments are older than 20 days or are
contact" more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
211
Depending on the number of stored ap

pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
E-mails are transmitted without an attach
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
Text were already transmitted from the mo
bile phone in a shortened form.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
212
Contacts Communication
Contacts
Vehicle equipment 4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
tems.
Note 5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.
Equipment version without the mobile phone In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys
preparation package. tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid
ance is possible for all addresses.
General information
6. If necessary, "Store".
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav
igation.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
New contact top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
1. "Contacts"
2. Create a contact.
2. "New contact"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
213
Communication Contacts
2. "My contacts" 2. Select the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination

An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De address.
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
2. Open "Options".
search is offered, refer to page 23.
3. "Check as destination"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts: 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Symbol Storage location Selecting the sorting order of the

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not names
been checked as a destination. Names can be displayed in a different order.
In the vehicle; the address has 1. "My contacts"

been checked as a destination. 2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
Editing a contact last name"
Deleting contacts
2. "Edit contact"
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
3. Change the entries.

4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination
214
ConnectedDrive Communication
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment BMW Assist is activated.
This chapter describes all series equipment as Services offered

Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
tems. Automatic Collision Notification: under cer
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As
BMW Assist
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services, Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
e.g., transmission of the position data of your Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if sistance is needed in the event of a break
an Emergency Request has been initiated. down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi
vidually agreed upon contract. Customer Relations: connection with Cus
tomer Relations for information on all as
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist pects of your vehicle.
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
service center. After the BMW Assist system status or required inspections are transmit
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services ted to your service center, either automati
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be cally before a service due date or when you
reactivated by a service center after you sign a request a BMW service appointment.
new contract. Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex
Requirements ample, the remote control is not available
The installed BMW Assist system is logged and the vehicle needs to be opened.
in to a wireless communications network. Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
This network must be capable of transmit that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
ting the services. BMW Assist Response Center can deter
To transmit position data, the vehicle must mine its position.
be able to determine the current position. In addition to these services, the optional
The BMW Assist service contract was Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
signed with your service center or with the and information for route planning, traffic,
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling and weather. A limited number of calls can
must have been completed. be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
215
Communication ConnectedDrive
the mobile phone is not available or dis Concierge service

charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW General information
Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor
mation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
TeleService can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
General information the optional Convenience Plan.
TeleService supports communication with your
service center. Starting the Concierge service
Data on the vehicle's service requirements 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
can be sent directly to the service center. In 2. "Concierge"
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
The service varies by country.
Connection costs may ensue.
Services may be restricted abroad.
3. "Start service"
Requirements A voice connection is established with the BMW
BMW Assist is activated. Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
phone that has been recommended by
BMW for TeleService and that is configured
for mobile data communication must be Messages
connected with the vehicle. Information on messages, refer to page 207.
Wireless reception is available.
The ignition is switched on.
Roadside Assistance
Using TeleService
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
At a glance
vehicle. BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break
Even if the TeleServices are not active, a voice
down.
contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
a Check Control message, refer to page 77.
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.
216
Starting Roadside Assistance without After the data are transmitted, the voice con
BMW Assist or TeleService nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" lished.
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis BMW Online
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con
nection is established to Roadside Assis At a glance
tance.
A business search can be opened via BMW On
line.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Starting Roadside Assistance with Independent JPEG Group.
BMW Assist or TeleService
Requirements
General information Subscription to the optional Convenience
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support Plan.
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
The date setting on the Control Display is
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
current.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" The vehicle is located within wireless net
2. "Roadside Assistance" work coverage.
3. "Start service"
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are 3. If necessary, "OK".
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are The BMW Online home page is displayed.
transmitted automatically.
217
Operating BMW Online Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or

To start a search: TeleService
Turn the controller to highlight an element. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
Press the controller to display an element. 2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page" Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re
quest the arrangement of a service appoint
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request

Loading a new page 2. "Service Request"
1. Open "Options". 3. "Start service"
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 77.
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations Automatic Service Request

The TeleService data necessary for servicing
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
or TeleService partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec
tion is established to Customer Relations.
218
To check when your service partner was noti Data transfer

fied:
During the updating of BMW services, display
1. "Vehicle Info" the status of the data transfer.
2. "Vehicle status"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
3. Open "Options". phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
software applications are displayed on the Con
4. "Last Service Request" trol Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Services status Requirements
Displaying available services The mobile phone is suitable.
Display of all services available in the vehicle. The mobile phone operating system sup
ports the software applications of Apps.
Software applications are installed on the
2. "Service Status" cell phone and ready to use.
3. "Available services" Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part
of Apps.
Use only BMW approved software applica
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available
software applications and their installation can
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center.
Updating BMW Assist Create the entries.

Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist. Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" pants and other road users may be put in danger
2. "Service Status" because of the distraction from driving.
3. "Update BMW Assist" For reasons of safety, some software applica
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station
ary.
219
Operating Apps Some mobile phones cannot simultane

1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
adapter or via the USB audio interface. free system.
2. "ConnectedDrive" If necessary, restart the software application

on the cell phone after a phone conversa
3. Select the desired software application.
tion.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis
played on the Control Display. They can be op
erated via iDrive.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.

2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell
phone functions to a higher level or back.
Press button twice to switch back to the

main menu.
Notes
The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of
installed software applications on the mo
bile phone.
The data transmission of the software ap
plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
can last some time. Some software applica
tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.
220
221
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment Fuel cap
Opening
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
describes equipment that may not be found in flap.
tems.
General information
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range of
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.
Observe when handling fuel

Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations Closing
when handling fuel.
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you
Do not carry any spare fuel containers in clearly hear a click.
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident. Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
224
Refueling Mobility
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i: approx. 16.6 US gal/
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap 63 liters.
can be released manually:
1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side

panel at the rear and remove it.
2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol
out of the holder toward the front and pull.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
Premature pump shutoff.
Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, es
caping fuel may harm the environment or dam
age the vehicle.
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of per
sonal injury and property damage.
Fuel tank capacity

X1 sDrive28i: approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters.
225
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
well as country-specific and special equipment Recommended fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
also applies to safety-related functions and sys BMW recommends AKI 89.
tems. Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the specified
minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not
Fuel quality run properly.
Gasoline If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat

For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump
as containing metals. Minimum fuel grade
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline without The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
metal additives harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline stalling, especially under certain environmental
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; conditions such as high ambient temperature
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other and high altitude, may occur.
components will be permanently damaged.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade AKI number
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
standards: deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
US: ASTM 4806xx
Failure to comply with these recommendations
CAN: CGSB-3.511xx
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable nance.
standard.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys
tem.
226
Fuel Mobility
227
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
describes equipment that may not be found in The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected approved and tire brands recommended by
special equipment or the country version. This BMW; a list of these is available from your serv
also applies to safety-related functions and sys ice center.
tems. For correct identification of the right tire inflation
pressures, observe the following:
Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure Maximum allowable driving speed.
Safety information
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also 100 mph or 160 km/h
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ad
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
just pressures to the respective tire inflation
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres
pressures listed on the following pages in the
sure.
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
door is open.
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an Do not exceed the maximum permissible
accident. speed
The maximum permissible speed for these tire
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset
pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h Do not exceed
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 90, or
this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
dents could occur.
page 88.
228
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire inflation pressures for driving including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/
above 100 mph or 160 km/h h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
occur.
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of Observe all national and local maximum speed
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could oc
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the fol cur.
lowing pages in the column for traveling speeds
Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive 28i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with

cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38

225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.8/41
Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

Without high-speed tuning feature
229

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.9/42

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 2.6/38 3.1/45

225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
230

bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.8/41 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 3.1/45

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive 28i/X1 xDrive 35i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38

225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.8/41

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

Without high-speed tuning feature
231

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.6/38 3.1/45

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.9/42

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 2.6/38 3.0/44

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 2.8/41 3.2/46

225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.8/41 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 3.0/44
232

bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 3.0/44 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 3.2/46

T 135/80 R 17 103 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire identification marks Tire age

The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
tire identification mark: DOT ... 1012 means that
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
the tire was manufactured in the week 10 of
tires.
2012.
Tire size BMW recommends that you replace all tires af
ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
for 10 years.
225: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in % Uniform Tire Quality Grading
R: radial tire code Quality grades can be found where applicable
17: rim diameter in inches on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Temperature A
Speed letter
DOT Quality Grades
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Treadwear
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Traction AA A B C
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
Temperature A B C
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
All passenger car tires must conform to
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation. Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
DOT code:
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
DOT xxxx xxx 1012 under controlled conditions on a specified gov
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
xxx: tire size and tire design 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire
1012: tire age
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
233
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, RSC Run-flat tires
however, and may depart significantly from the The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
norm due to variations in driving habits, service with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
practices and differences in road characteristics page 236.
and climate.
M+S
Traction
Winter and all-season tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
These have better winter properties than
AA, A, B, and C.
summer tires.
Those grades represent the tires ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled XL
conditions on specified government test surfa
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
Tire tread
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro
Summer tires
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
Temperature 0.12 in/3 mm.
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
and C, representing the tires resistance to the the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions Winter tires
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
tained high temperature can cause the material 0.16 in/4 mm.
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire less suitable for winter operation.
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must Minimum tread depth
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
sible tire failure. circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,

Tread Wear Indicator.
234
Tire damage Changing wheels and tires

General information Mounting
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob Information on mounting tires
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
Notes
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
the danger of subsequent damage and related
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
safety hazards.
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning Wheel and tire combination
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to Information on the right wheel and tire combi
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro obtained from the service center.
file tires. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
fects: DSC.
Unusual vibrations during driving. To maintain good handling and vehicle re
Unusual handling such as a strong tendency sponse, use only tires with a single tread con
to pull to the left or right. figuration from a single manufacturer.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs, Following tire damage, have the original wheel
road damage and similar situations. and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
In case of tire damage
Approved wheels and tires
If there are indications of tire damage, re
duce your speed immediately and have the The manufacturer of your vehicle recom
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, mends that you use only wheels and tires that
there is the increased risk of an accident. have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop. For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
other road users.
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
Repair of tire damage ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re Pressure Monitor
sult. When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
235
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe
a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your service center cialist or from your service center.
will be glad to advise you.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Recommended tire brands Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci
dents can occur.
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles

The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve against swapping wheels between the front and
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These rear axles.
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. This can impair the handling characteristics.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest Rotating the tires is not permissible when using
standards for safety and handling. different types of tires.
Storage
Retreaded tires
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec
as little exposure to light as possible.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
Retreaded tires grease and fuels.
Possibly substantial variations in the de Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres
sign and age of the tire casing structures can sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.
Run-flat tires
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Label
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 /+7 .
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, RSC label on the tire sidewall.
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
236
The wheels are composed of special rims and

tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Driving with a damaged tire:

Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 88
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 90
Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 95.
237
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Coolant expansion tank242 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding en
3 Filler neck for washer fluid for the headlamp gine oil
and window washer system61
Hood If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide

lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
Opening the hood only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Working in the engine compartment
the danger of subsequent damage and related
Never attempt to perform any service or safety hazards.
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
238
Engine compartment Mobility
Risk of damage Hood open when driving

Before opening the hood, ensure that the If you see any signs that the hood is not
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the completely closed while driving, pull over imme
window; otherwise, damage may occur. diately and close it securely.
1. Pull the lever. Danger of pinching

Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Engine oil
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
2. Lift the hood all the way. driving style, for example, results in considerably
3. Press the release handle and open the hood. higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the engine oil level

Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.
Requirements
The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
Closing the hood 6.2 miles/10 km.
The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Display in the instrument cluster

1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro
Drop the hood from a height of ap

prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to en
gage.
239
priate symbol appears in the display, ac Symbol Function

companied by the word "OIL".
Oil level is too high.
Overfilling oil damages the en
gine. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
The oil level sensor is defective.

Do not add engine oil.
It is possible to continue driv
ing. Note the newly calculated
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. remaining mileage until the
The oil level is checked and the reading dis next oil service, refer to
played. page 75. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Possible displays
Display via iDrive
Symbol Function
1. "Vehicle Info"
Oil level OK. 2. "Vehicle status"
Oil level is being checked.

This can take about 3 minutes
if the car is at a standstill on a
level surface, or about 5 mi
nutes while the car is on the
move.
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil at minimum level:
Add a maximum quantity of Possible messages
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil, "Engine oil level OK"
refer to page 241, at the next "Measurement not possible at this time."
opportunity.
"Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
240
Engine compartment Mobility
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter Protect children

of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil
also to Adding engine oil below. dren and heed the warnings on the containers
"Engine oil level too high! Have this to prevent health risks.
checked."
Too much engine oil Oil types for refilling
Have the vehicle checked immedi
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en
Notes
gine damage. No oil additives
"Measurement inactive. Have this Do not use oil additives as these may
checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi cause engine damage.
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal
Viscosity classes of engine oils
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
service, refer to page 75. Have the system When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
checked as soon as possible. the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos
ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or
Adding engine oil malfunctions or engine damage may occur.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the

Filler neck engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of
BMW Longlife-01 FE
oil only after a corresponding message appears
on the Control Display.
Further information on approved oil types can be
Add oil promptly
obtained from the service center.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result. Alternative oil types
Too much engine oil If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
specification can be used:
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam
age. Gasoline engine
API SM or a higher quality standard
241
Oil change filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to

An oil change should be carried out by the serv the filler neck.
ice center only.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to

the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
Coolant 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi
nated as soon as possible.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine Disposal
Do not open the cooling system while the Comply with the appropriate environmen
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may tal protection regulations when disposing
cause burns. of coolant additives.
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.
Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suit
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Checking the coolant level

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock
wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres
sure to escape; then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
242
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment On the Control Display, the remaining distances
and times for selected maintenance require
This chapter describes all series equipment as ments and any legally required deadlines can be
well as country-specific and special equipment displayed individually, refer to page 75.
describes equipment that may not be found in Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
tems.
the right array of service procedures for your ve
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re
BMW Maintenance System
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 73; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS
Condition Based Service is not ensured.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac
The maintenance system provides information count.
on required maintenance measures and thus If this occurs, have a service center update the
provides support in maintaining road safety and time-dependent maintenance procedures,
the operational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti
vated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac Service and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter
Information Booklet for US
mines the maintenance requirements. models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for
amount of maintenance you need to your user Canadian models
profile.
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor
Details on the service requirements, refer to mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
page 75, can be displayed on the Control Dis Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
play. additional information on service requirements.
243
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance and repair should be performed by Fuel cap

your service center. Make sure to have regular
The indicator lamp lights up.
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service the OBD system may conclude that
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight
tries are proof of regular maintenance. ened, the display should go out in a short time.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check

ing the primary components in the vehicle emis
sions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos
sible.
The warning lamp flashes under certain cir
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Display of the previously described mal

functions on Canadian models.
244
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment Front
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 61.
tems.
Tool kit
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel

and storage compartment in the cargo area. 3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech
Wiper blade replacement anism toward the front.
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order,
blades making sure it engages.
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have Risk of damage
not been installed; this may damage the wind Before opening the hood, ensure that the
shield. wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the
window; otherwise, damage may occur.
245
Mobility Replacing components
Rear Do not perform work/bulb replacement on

xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car
ried out improperly.
Do not touch the bulbs
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
and reduce its service life.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
anism toward the front.
hold the bulb by its base.
Lamp and bulb replacement Light-emitting diodes LED

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu
Notes cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls, displays and other equipment in
Lamps and bulbs your vehicle.
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution These light-emitting diodes, which operate us
to vehicle safety. ing a concept similar to that applied in conven
tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
light-emitting diodes.
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them Do not remove the covers
or they are not described here. Do not remove the covers, and never stare
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs into the unfiltered light for several hours; other
at the service center. wise, irritation of the retina could result.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
Headlamp glass
otherwise, there is the danger of getting Condensation can form on the inside of the
burned. headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you
drive with the lights switched on, the conden
Working on the lighting system sation evaporates after a short time. The head
When working on the lighting system, you lamps do not need to be changed.
should always switch off the lights affected to If the condensation in the headlamps does not
prevent short circuits. evaporate after trips with the lights switched on,
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage and the amount of moisture in the headlamps
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions increases, for example if water droplets form,
provided by the bulb manufacturer. have them checked by your service center.
246
Removing the headlamp cover 2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch. To
The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the open the locks, turn them counterclockwise
engine compartment, and the low beam and turn all the way using a coin, for example.
signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding cover
in the wheel arch.
Halogen headlamps
1 High beam cover
Low beams and high beams
2 Low beam cover
Wear protective goggles and gloves
3 Turn signal bulb socket
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
To remove the covers: wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,
High beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci
and take the cover out of the guide. dentally damaged during replacement.
Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5. The low beams and high beams have separate
covers.
Attach the covers carefully
H7 bulb, 55 watt
When attaching the covers, proceed care
fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
age to the headlamp system. control out of the ignition lock.
Proceed in reverse order when attaching the 2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the
covers. wheel arch, refer to page 247.
3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to
Access via the wheel arch page 247.
For low beams and turn signals only: 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
1. Turn the wheel inward. 5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the
anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2.
247
6. Remove the bulb. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on

7. Insert the new bulb. xenon headlamps
8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it. Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
9. Plug in the connector.
service center.
10. Reattach the cover.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car
wheel arch. ried out improperly.
Parking and roadside parking lamps

Parking lamps and roadside parking
5-watt bulb, W5W lamps, daytime running lights
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote H8 bulb, 35 watt
control out of the ignition lock.
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to control out of the ignition lock.
page 247.
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow. page 247.
3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90, see arrow, and
pull it out.
4. Pull off the bulb and replace it.

5. Insert the bulb socket.
6. Reattach the cover. 4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
Xenon headlamps 5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
6. Reattach the cover.
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
248
Turn signals, front

21-watt bulb, PY21W
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch, re
fer to page 247.
1 Backup lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp LED
3 Brake lamp
4 Turn signal
5 Inner brake lamp
If bulb 2 is defective, please contact the service

3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left center.
and remove it.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn Lamps in fender
ing it to the left for removal and replacement. All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and turn
it all the way to the right.
6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.
2. Press the cover out of the rear cargo area
side trim and remove it.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 246.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors use LED
technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lamps
The tail lamps consist of two parts. One part is 3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing
in the tailgate and the other is in the fender. down the upper clip, arrow 1.
P21W bulbs, 21 watt
249
On the right side, take the button with the 6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see ar
fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward rows, and remove it.
the front if necessary.
7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn

4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
out the bulb holder. 8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn clicks into place.
ing it to the left for removal and replacement. 9. Insert the handle for opening manually
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly through the tailgate panel opening and
clicks into place. press it in.
7. Replace the cover. 10. Reattach the tailgate panel.
Inside brake lamps in the tailgate License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
control out of the ignition lock. These lamps are made using LED technology.
2. Take the warning triangle out of the bracket, Contact your service center in the event of a
refer to page 254. malfunction.
3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel, ar
rows.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
to page 236, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately in
the event of a puncture.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
When mounting new tires or changing from
4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
ward. tires for your own safety.
5. Push out the handle for opening manually in The tools for changing wheels are available as
the event of an electrical malfunction, refer accessories from your service center.
to page 36, insert it through the opening,
and take off the panel.
250
Jacking points for the vehicle jack General information

Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to
achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in the
following cases:
When the vehicle is frequently used to drive
short distances.
When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo Starting aid terminals
cated in the positions shown.
Only charge using the starting aid terminals, re
fer to page 255, in the engine compartment
while the engine is switched off.
Vehicle battery
Power failure
Maintenance After a temporary power loss, some equipment
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec needs to be reinitialized.
trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Your service center will be glad to advise you on Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
questions regarding the battery. again, refer to page 47.
Time: update, refer to page 72.
Battery replacement
Date: update, refer to page 73.
Use approved vehicle batteries
Radio station: save again, refer to page 162.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
Navigation system: wait for the navigation
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
system to be operational.
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be pos
ble. sible to raise the roof. Have the system ini
tialized by the service center.
After a battery replacement, have the battery
Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
registered on the vehicle by your service center
page 112.
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available. xDrive: the system automatically initializes
as you drive. During this time, indicator
Charging the battery lamps light up. If the lamps do not disappear
during the current trip, have the system
Note checked.
Do not connect the charger to the socket

Disposing of old batteries
Do not connect the battery charger to the
Have old batteries disposed of by your
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
service center or bring them to a recy
this could damage the battery.
cling center.
251
Maintain the battery in an upright position for

transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.
Access to fuse box:
1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Release the damper from the bottom holder
by applying pressure toward the front, ar
row 1.
3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing
on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.
A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the current
distributor.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
back of the cover.
Spare fuses are available from the service cen
ter.
252
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve
This chapter describes all series equipment as hicle.
BMW Assist is activated.
describes equipment that may not be found in Radio readiness is switched on.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
special equipment or the country version. This wireless communications network sup
also applies to safety-related functions and sys ported by BMW Assist.
tems. The Assist system is operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hazard warning flashers Emergency Request not guaranteed

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.
Service contract
After your contract with BMW Assist has ex
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
The button for the hazard warning system is lo After deactivation, an Emergency Request
cated on the center console. is no longer possible.
Under certain circumstances, the system
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
can be reactivated by a service center after
While driving and when using the turn sig you sign a new contract.
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn Initiating an Emergency Request
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect.
Emergency Request
Requirements
Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up.
253
Mobility Breakdown assistance
The LED lights up: an Emergency Request Roadside Assistance

was initiated. The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 216,
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
vehicle until the connection has been estab connection to Roadside Assistance can be es
lished. tablished directly.
The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es
tablished. Warning triangle
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de
termine the necessary rescue measures, On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press
such as the current position of the vehicle if on the tab, arrow.
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist First aid kit
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica The first aid kit is located in a storage compart
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button. ment on the right side in the cargo area.
Some of the articles contained in the first aid

pouch have a limited service life.
Roadside Assistance
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg
ularly and replace any items promptly.
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
254
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
dure.
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter
Do not touch live parts minal. Pull the cover up and off.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo
nents while the engine is running.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi The body ground or a special nut acts as the
cle. negative terminal.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Connecting jumper cables
Bodywork contact between vehicles 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter
There must not be any contact between minal.
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
is a danger of shorting. jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
Starting aid terminals terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
Connecting order 3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
to be started.
from sparking.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis
tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre
255
sponding engine or body ground of the ve Do not have the vehicle towed
hicle to be started. Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine. Tow truck
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another Do not lift the vehicle
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
tery to recharge. body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. result.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order. Towing your vehicle
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Observe before towing your vehicle
Light towing vehicle
Tow-starting and towing The towing vehicle must not be lighter
Observe applicable laws and regulations than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to
control vehicle response.
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing. Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
No additional passengers Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
Do not transport any passengers other
cause damage.
than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.
Automatic transmission, 6-gear

Automatic transmission, 8-gear:
transporting your vehicle Selector lever in position N.
Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Note Do not exceed a towing speed of
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. 40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
Therefore, contact a service center in the event 90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmission
of a breakdown. can occur.
256
Being towed Towing methods

Follow the towing instructions Do not lift the vehicle
Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
damage or accidents may occur. body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.
Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un Tow bar
available. The tow fittings used should be on the same
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle side on both vehicles.
tilted, as the front wheels could turn. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
When the engine is stopped, there is no the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
power assist. Consequently, more force the following:
needs to be applied when braking and steer Clearance and maneuvering capability will
ing. be sharply limited during cornering.
Larger steering wheel movements are re The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
quired. is attached offset.
Switch on the hazard warning system, de
pending on local regulations. Tow rope
If the electrical system has failed, clearly When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
identify the vehicle being towed by placing the tow rope is taut.
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
dow. the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Towing other vehicles Attaching the tow rope correctly
General information Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se
Light towing vehicle cured on other parts of the vehicle.
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be Tow truck
possible to control vehicle response.
sDrive
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.
Switch on the hazard warning system, de
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win
dow.
257
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck Screw thread

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
xDrive
Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover

is pushed out at the top edge and can be pulled
out.
Towing a vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just Tow-starting
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case could Note
be damaged. Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
Tow fitting cannot be started by tow-starting.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the edied.
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover and storage compartment in the cargo
area, refer to page 245.
It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover in the cargo area, refer to page 245.
Tow fitting, information on use
Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve
hicle can occur.
258
Care Mobility
Care
Vehicle equipment Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
special equipment or the country version. This Note the following:
also applies to safety-related functions and sys Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
tems. damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
Car washes the vehicle.
Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 60,
Notes to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers Move the rear window wiper to its resting
When using steam jets or high-pressure position, deactivate it, and protect it against
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away damage. Ask the car wash operator about
and use a maximum temperature of any necessary protective measures.
140 /60 . Remove additional attachments, for in
Holding them too close or using excessively stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam there is a risk that these may be damaged.
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
Guide rails in car washes
long-term damage.
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
pressure washer.
could be damaged.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers Before driving into a car wash
When using high-pressure washers, do not The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park are taken.
Distance Control or the backup camera, for in
stance, for extended periods of time and only Automatic transmission
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win lock, even with Comfort Access.
ter. 2. Engage the selector lever or transmission
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve position N.
hicle. 3. Release the handbrake, refer to page 58.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
259
Mobility Care
In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis Vehicle paint

sion position P is engaged automatically. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Automatically after approx. 30 minutes. value retention. Environmental influences in
When the remote control is removed from areas with high air pollution or natural contami
the ignition lock. nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency
Headlamps and extent of your car care to these influences.
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or Immediately remove aggressive substances,
caustic cleansers. such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop
pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
the paintwork.
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Leather care
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
ice scraper.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
After washing the vehicle Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
wear and premature degradation of the leather
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
surface.
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur. To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
Fully remove an residue from the windows; oth
months.
erwise, streaking may occur when the wind
shield wipers are activated, impairing your view Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
and causing wiper noise. dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
Vehicle care layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
Car care products service center.
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been Upholstery material care
tested and approved. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Car care and cleaning products If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
Follow the instructions on the container. soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi
terial vigorously.
cles.
Damage from Velcro fasteners
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan
gerous and harmful to your health. Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.
260
Care Mobility
Caring for special components grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter Safety belts
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets thus have a negative impact on safety.
above 140 /60 ; follow the manufacturer's
instructions. No chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
Chrome surfaces the webbing.
Carefully clean components such as the radiator Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
grille or door handles with an ample supply of belts clipped into their buckles.
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
until they are dry.
Rubber components
Carpets and floor mats
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans
ers. No objects in the area around the pedals
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
icon-containing car care products in order to objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
avoid damage or reduced noise damping. otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Fine wood parts Do not place additional floor mats over existing
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo mats or other objects.
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Only use floor mats that have been approved for
cloth. the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
Plastic components again when they are returned after being re
These include: moved, such as for cleaning.
Imitation leather surfaces. Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
Headliner. compartment for cleaning.
Lamp lenses. When returning the floor mats, secure them
Instrument cluster cover. again to prevent slipping.
Matte black spray-coated components. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
Painted parts in the interior.
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
Clean with a microfiber cloth. in the direction of travel only.
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner. Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
261
Mobility Care
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.
Long-term vehicle storage

Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
262
Care Mobility
263
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
1 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors: 3 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 81 in
70.8 inches/1,798 mm ches/2,058 mm
2 Vehicle height: 60.8 inches/1,545 mm 4 Wheelbase: 108.7 inches/2,760 mm
5 Vehicle length: 176.5 inches/4,484 mm
266
Technical data Reference
6 Tailgate opening height: 80.0 inches/

2,031 mm
Smallest turning circle dia.: 37 ft/11.3 m, with Height with roof antenna: 62 in/1,573 mm
xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m.
Weights
X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 4,497/2,040 4,707/2,135 4,861/2,205

weight
Load lbs/kg 904/410 904/410 904/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,326/1,055 2,425/1,100
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,546/1,155 2,590/1,175 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 25.0-56.0/420 25.0-56.0/420 25.0-56.0/420-

1,350 1,350 1,350
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank Fuel specifications, refer to

page 226
X1 sDrive28i US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61
X1 xDrive28i, X1 xDrive35i US gal/liters approx. 16.6/63
Window washer system US qt/liters approx. 6.3/6 Details, refer to page 61

With headlamp washer sys
tem
267
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
Short commands for voice activation

system
Vehicle equipment To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: Voice commands
The following short commands apply to vehicles
equipped with a voice activation system. They
have no function in vehicles in which only the
mobile phone is operated using the voice.
tems.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. Main menu
Open the options. Options
Open the settings. Settings
Settings on the Control Display. Control display
Open the time and date. Time and date
Open the language and units. Language and units
Open the speed limit. Speed
Open the light. Lighting
Open the door lock. Door locks
268
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. Onboard info
Open the trip computer. Trip computer
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info
Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. Navigation
Open the destination entry. Enter address
Enter the address. Enter address
Enter the town/city. City
Enter the country. State
Enter the postal code. Postal Code
Open destination guidance. Guidance
Start destination guidance. Start guidance
Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance
Open the home address. Home address
Open the route criteria. Route preference
Open the route. Route information
Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions
269
Function Command
Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions
Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions
Display the address book. Address book
Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations
Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info
Special destinations. Points of interest
Map
Function Command
Display the map. Map
Map facing north. Map facing north
Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel
Perspective map. Map perspective view
Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling
Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet
Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale

100 meters
Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map

scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale

5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. Switch on splitscreen
Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen
Adjust the split screen. Split screen content
Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north
Split screen, current position. Split screen current position
270
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of
travel
Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view
Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split
screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g.,

split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions
Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info
Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer
Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. Enter address
Trip list. Stored trips
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g.,

93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. Radio
Open the FM stations. F M
271
Function Command
Open the manual search. Manual
Select a frequency range. Select frequency
Open a station. Select station
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., fre

quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. A M
Open the manual search. Manual
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio
Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on
Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite

radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. Presets
Choose a stored station. Select preset
Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2
272
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5

or
C D track ... e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. C D on
Select a CD. Select C D
Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia
CD and DVD. C D
Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen. Entertainment details
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. Music search
Open the current playback. Current playback
Open the music collection. Music collection
Play back the music collection. Music collection on
Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. External devices
Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth
273
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. Tone
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. Dial number
Open the Telephone menu. Telephone
Display the phone book. Phonebook
Redialing. Redial
Display received calls. Received calls
List of messages. Messages
Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. Office
Display Office Today. Current office
Display the contacts. Contacts
Display the messages. Messages
Display the calendar. Calendar
Display the tasks. Tasks
Display the reminders. Reminders
274
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. Choose name
My contacts. My contacts
Open the contacts. Contacts
New contact. New contact
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. B M W Assist
Open ConnectedDrive. Connected Drive
Open BMW Online. B M W Online
275
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alarm system 38 Assistance with driving off, re
Alarm system fer to Drive-off assistant 97
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys Avoiding unintentional Assistance with starting en
tem 94 alarms 39 gine, refer to Jump-start
Accident, refer to Emergency Ending an alarm 39 ing 255
Request, initiating 253 Interior motion sensor 39 Audio device, external 121
Tilt alarm sensor 39
Acoustic signal, refer to Check Audio playback 171
All around the headliner 17
Control 77 Audio playback, Blue
ALL program 107
Activated charcoal filter with tooth 185
All-season tires, refer to Win
automatic climate con Automatic
ter tires 236 Air distribution 106
trol 108
All-wheel drive, refer to Air flow rate 106
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
xDrive 96 Automatic car wash 259
Brake force display 93
Alternating-code hand-held Automatic climate control
Adaptive light control 81
transmitter 111 Automatic air distribu
Additional telephone 192
AM/FM station 162 tion 106
Additives, coolant 242
Announcement, navigation, Automatic, cruise control 98
Additives, engine oil 241
refer to Spoken instruc Automatic Curb Monitor 48
After washing vehicle 260
tions 151 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Airbags 85
Antifreeze, coolant 242 Function 56
Airbags, indicator/warning
Antifreeze, washer fluid 61 Automatic headlamp con
light 88
Antilock Brake System, trol 80, 81
Air circulation, refer to Recir
ABS 94 Automatic recirculated air
culated air mode 107
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy control 107
Air conditioning mode
Automatic climate con namic Stability Control Automatic transmission with
trol 105 DSC 94 Steptronic 62, 64
Ventilation 108 Anti-theft protection 32 Automatic transmission with
Air distribution Appointments 209 Steptronic
Automatic 106 Approved axle loads, refer to Interlock 62
Manual 106 Weights 267 Kickdown 63, 64
Air drying, refer to Cooling Approved engine oils 241 Overriding selector lever
function 107 lock 64
Approved gross vehicle
Air flow rate 106 AUTO program with automatic
weight, refer to Weights 267
Airing, refer to Ventilation 108 climate control 106
Armrest, refer to Center arm
Air pressure, refer to Tire infla AUX-IN port 121, 181
rest 120
tion pressure 228 Average fuel consumption 70
Arrival time, refer to Com
Air supply Average fuel consumption
puter 70
Automatic climate con Setting the units 72
Ashtray 114
trol 105 Average speed 70
Assist 215
Ventilation 108 Average speed, refer to Com
Assistance, Roadside Assis
Air vents puter 70
tance 254
Refer to Ventilation 108
276
Everything from A to Z Reference
Axle loads, refer to BMW Apps 219 Button for starting the engine,
Weights 267 BMW Apps, video play refer to Start/Stop button 54
back 184
B BMW Assist 215 C
BMW Assist, refer to Connec
Backrest curvature, refer to tedDrive 215 Calendar 209
Lumbar support 44 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer California Proposition 65
Backrests, refer to Seats 43 to Saving fuel 133 Warning 7
Backrest width adjustment 44 BMW Homepage 6 Camera, care 261
Back seats BMW Internet page 6 Camera, refer to Backup cam
Adjusting the backrest BMW maintenance sys era 102
tilt 115 tem 243 Can holder, refer to Cu
Backup camera 102 BMW Online 217 pholder 122
Backup camera, cleaning 104 Bottle holder, refer to Cu Car battery, refer to Vehicle
Backup camera, obstacle pholder 122 battery 251
marking 103 Brake assistant 94 Car care products 260
Backup camera, pathway Brake discs, breaking in 126 Care 259
lines 103 Brake fluid, refer to Service re Care, displays 262
Backup camera, turning quirements 75 Care, vehicle 260
lines 103 Brake force display 93 Cargo 130
Backup lamps, bulb replace Brake force distribution, elec Cargo area 115
ment 249 tronic 94 Cargo area
Balance 160 Brake lamps Comfort Access 37
Band-aids, refer to First aid Bulb replacement 249 Cover 115
kit 254 Brake lamps, brake force dis Folding up the cargo floor
Bass 160 play 93 panel 118
Battery Brake lights, adaptive 93 Multi-function hook 118
Remote control 30 Brake pads, breaking in 126 Partition net 116
Battery disposal 251 Brakes Cargo area, capacities 267
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat Handbrake 58 Cargo area, enlarging 115
tery 251 Brakes, BMW maintenance Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte
Battery replacement, remote system 243 rior lamps 84
control for vehicle 38 Brakes, service require Cargo area lid, refer to Tail
Before entering the car ments 75 gate 35
wash 259 Brake system, BMW mainte Cargo area net, refer to Parti
Belts, refer to Safety belts 45 nance system 243 tion net 116
Belt tensioners, refer to Safety Braking, notes 127 Cargo area, opening from the
belts 45 Breakdown assistance 254 inside 35
Beverage holder, refer to Cu Breakdown, transporting the Cargo area, opening from the
pholder 122 vehicle 256 outside 36
Black and white map dis Breaking in 126 Cargo floor panel
play 154 Brightness on the Control Dis Folding up 118
Blower, refer to Air flow play 75 Cargo floor panel, raising 118
rate 106 Bulb replacement, refer to Cargo straps, securing
Bluetooth audio 185 Lamp and bulb replace cargo 131
Bluetooth connection, activat ment 246 Car key, refer to Integrated
ing/deactivating 193 key/remote control 30
277
Carpet, care 261 Child restraint fixing sys Compartments, refer to Stor
Car phone, installation loca tems 50 age compartments 120, 121
tion, refer to Center arm Child restraint fixing systems, Compass, digital 112
rest 120 mounting 50 Computer 70
Car phone, refer to Tele Child safety locks 53 Computer, displaying informa
phone 192 Child seat, mounting 50 tion 70
Car vacuum cleaner, connect Child seats, refer to Transport Computer, displays on the
ing, refer to Connecting elec ing children safely 50 Control Display 70
trical devices 114 Chrome parts, care 261 Concierge service 216
Car wash 259 Cigarette lighter, connecting Condensation under the vehi
Catalytic converter, refer to electrical devices 114 cle 128
Hot exhaust system 126 Cigarette lighter, refer to Condition Based Service
CBS Condition Based Serv Lighter 114 CBS 243
ice 243 Cigarette lighter socket 114 Confirmation signals for lock
CD/DVD 170 Circulation of air, refer to Re ing/unlocking the vehicle 33
CD/DVD notes 175 circulated air mode 107 ConnectedDrive 215
CD changer 174 Cleaning, displays 262 Connecting, mobile phone, re
CDs, storing 176 Cleaning your BMW, refer to fer to Pairing the mobile
Cell phone 192 Care 259 phone 193
Cell phone, installation loca Clock 68 Consumption, refer to Aver
tion, refer to Center arm Clock age fuel consumption 70
rest 120 12h/24h format 73 Contacts 205, 213
Center armrest, front 120 Setting the time and date 73 Control Display 18
Center armrest, rear 121 Closing Control Display, care 262
Center brake lamp, bulb re From the inside 34 Control Display, settings 74
From the outside 32
placement 250 Controller 19
Clothes hooks 122
Center console, refer to Controls and displays 12
Cockpit 12
Around the center con Control systems, driving sta
Cold start, refer to Starting the
sole 16 bility 94
engine 55
Central locking Convenient operation
Comfort Access 36 Combination instrument, refer Glass sunroof 32
From the inside 34 to Instrument cluster 14 Window 32
Setting the unlocking char Combination switch, refer to Coolant 242
acteristics 32 Turn signal/high beams/ Coolant, checking the
Central locking system headlamp flasher 59 level 242
From the outside 31 Combination switch, refer to Coolant temperature 69
Principle 31 Washer/wiper system 59 Cooling function, switching on
Central screen, refer to Control Comfort Access and off 107
Display 18 Battery replacement 38 Cooling, maximum 106
Changes, technical, refer to Comfort area, refer to Around Cooling system, refer to Cool
Safety 6 the center console 16 ant 242
Changing wheels/tires 235 Compact wheel, inflation pres Corrosion on brake discs 128
Check Control 77 sure 228 Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte
Children, transporting 50 Compartment for remote con rior lamps 84
Child restraint fixing system trol, refer to Ignition lock 54 Cradle for telephone or mobile
LATCH 51 Compartment in floor 118 phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 202
278
Cruise control 98 Disposal, vehicle battery 251 E

Cruise control Distance warning, refer to Park
Malfunction 99 Distance Control PDC 100 ECO PRO 134
Cupholder 122 Divided rear seat backrest, re ECO PRO display 134
Curb weight, refer to fer to Enlarging the cargo ECO PRO driving mode 134
Weights 267 area 115 ECO PRO mode 134
Current fuel consumption 69 Divided screen view, split EfficientDynamics, refer to
Current location, storing 142 screen 22 Saving fuel 133
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive Door key, refer to Remote con Electrical malfunction
light control 81 trol with integrated key 30 Door lock 34
Door lock 34 Driver's door 34
D Doors, manual operation 34 Fuel filler flap 225
Doors, unlocking and locking Tailgate 36
Dashboard lighting, refer to In Confirmation signals 33 Electric seat adjustment 44
strument lighting 83 From the inside 34 Electronic brake-force distri
Dashboard, refer to Cock From the outside 32 bution 94
pit 12 DOT Quality Grades 233 Electronic engine oil level
Data, technical 266 Downhill control 96 check 239
Date Draft-free ventilation 108 Electronic Stability Program
Date format 74 Drive-off assistant 97 ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil
Setting 73 Driving away on inclines, refer ity Control DSC 94
Daytime running lights 81 to Drive-off assistant 97 Emergency activation
Daytime running lights, bulb Driving notes, breaking in 126 Automatic transmission, re
replacement 248 Driving notes, general 126 fer to Overriding selector
Defroster Driving on poor roads 128 lever lock 64
Rear window 107 Emergency operation
Driving stability control sys
Destination entry via the ad Door lock, refer to Manual
tems 94
dress book 142 operation 34
Driving through water 127
Destination guidance 149 Emergency operation, fuel
Driving tips, refer to Driving
Destination guidance with in filler flap, unlocking man
notes 126
termediate destinations 147 ually 225
Dry air, refer to Cooling func
Destination input, naviga Emergency Request 253
tion 107
tion 140 Emergency service, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability Con
Digital clock 68 Roadside Assistance 254
trol 94
Digital compass 112 Energy-conscious driving, re
DTC Dynamic Traction Con
Digital radio 163 fer to Current fuel consump
trol 95
Dimming mirrors 49 tion 69
DTMF suffix dialing 198 Energy, saving
Directional indicators, refer to DVD/CD 170 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Turn signals 59 DVDs, storing 176 Function 56
Display lighting, refer to Instru DVD, video 172 Energy, saving, refer to Saving
ment lighting 83 Dynamic destination guid fuel 133
Displays and controls 12 ance 156 Engine, breaking in 126
Displays, care 262 Dynamic Stability Control Engine compartment 238
Displays, cleaning 262 DSC 94 Engine coolant, refer to Cool
Displays, refer to Instrument Dynamic Traction Control ant 242
cluster 14 DTC 95 Engine oil, adding 241
Disposal, coolant 242
279
Engine oil, additives, refer to Exterior mirrors, folding in and Flooding, refer to Driving
Approved engine oils 241 out 48 through water 127
Engine oil, alternative oil External audio device 121 Floor carpet, care 261
types 241 External devices 181 Floor mats, care 261
Engine oil, BMW maintenance External temperature dis FM/AM station 162
system 243 play 68 Fog lamps 83
Engine oil change intervals, re External temperature display Fog lamps, indicator lamp 83
fer to Service require Changing the unit of meas Foldable rear seat back
ments 75 ure 72 rest 115
Engine oil, checking the On computer 72 Foot brake 127
level 239 External temperature warn Footwell lamps, refer to Inte
Engine oil, filling capacity 267 ing 68 rior lamps 84
Engine oil temperature 69 Externel temperature dis For your own safety 6
Engine oil types, alterna play 68 Four-wheel drive, refer to
tive 241 Eyes for securing cargo 131 xDrive 96
Engine oil types, ap Front airbags 85
proved 241 F Front fog lamps 83
Engine, overheating, refer to FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88
Coolant temperature 69 Fader 160 Fuel 226
Engine start, assistance 255 Failure messages, refer to Fuel
Engine, starting 55 Check Control 77 Refer to Average fuel con
Engine, starting False alarm sumption 70
Comfort Access 36 Avoiding unintentional Fuel, additives 226
Engine, starting, Start/Stop alarms 39 Fuel, average consump
Ending an alarm 39 tion 70
button 54
Fastening safety belts, refer to Fuel cap 224
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
Safety belts 45 Fuel cap, closing 224
button 54
Fault messages, refer to Fuel consumption display
Engine, switching off 55
Check Control 77 Average fuel consump
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
Filling capacities 267 tion 70
lamps 84
Filter Fuel consumption display,
Environmentally friendly driv
Refer to Microfilter/acti current fuel consumption 69
ing, refer to Current fuel con vated-charcoal filter with au
sumption 69 Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
tomatic climate control 108
Equalizer 160 Current fuel consumption 69
Fine wood, care 261
Equipment, interior 110 Fuel filler flap, closing 224
First aid kit 254
ESP Electronic Stability Pro Fuel filler flap, opening 224
Fitting for towing 258
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
Flashing when locking/unlock
bility Control DSC 94 case of an electrical malfunc
ing 33
Exchanging wheels/tires 235 tion 225
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88
Exhaust system 126 Fuel gauge 69
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
Exterior mirrors 48 Fuel, saving 133
chains 237
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 48 Fuel tank capacity, refer to Fill
Flat tire, run-flat tires 236
Exterior mirrors, automatic ing capacities 267
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
dimming 49 Fuel tank contents, refer to
TPM 90
Exterior mirrors, automatic Filling capacities 267
Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91
heating 49 Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca
Flat tire, wheel change 250
pacities 267
280
Fuse 252 HDC Hill Descent Control 96 Hills 128

HD Radio 163 Holder for beverages 122
G Head airbags 85 Holder for remote control, re
Headlamp control, auto fer to Ignition lock 54
Garage door opener, refer to matic 80, 81 Homepage 6
Universal Garage Door Headlamp courtesy delay fea Hood 238
Opener 110 ture 81 Hood, opening 238
Gasoline 226 Headlamp cover, remov Horn 12
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel ing 247 Hot exhaust system 126
gauge 69 Headlamp flasher 59, 82 Hotline 218
Gasoline quality 226 Headlamp flasher, indicator House number, entering for
Gas station recommenda lamp 15 navigation 141
tion 151 Headlamps 80 Hydraulic brake assistant 94
Gear change Headlamps Hydroplaning 127
Automatic transmission with Bulb replacement 247
Steptronic 62 Headlamps, care 260 I
Gear change, automatic trans Headlamps, cleaning 60
mission with Steptronic 66 Headlamps, cleaning, washer Ice warning, refer to External
Gear change, via shift pad fluid 62 temperature warning 68
dles 66 Headliner 17 Icy roads, refer to External
Gear display, automatic trans Head restraints 46 temperature warning 68
mission with Steptronic 62 Head restraints Identification marks, tires 233
General driving notes 126 Adjusting the height 46 Identification number, refer to
Glass sunroof, electric Removing 47 Engine compartment 238
Convenient operation 32 Heating
iDrive 18
Remote control 32 Rear window 107
iDrive
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor Seats 45
Changing settings 74
amic glass sunroof 41 Heating, mirrors 49
Changing the date and
Glove compartment 120 Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing time 73
Glove compartment cargo 131 Changing the language 74
USB interface 120 Height adjustment Changing the units of meas
Glove compartment, light Seats 43 ure and display format 72
ing 120 Height, refer to Dimen Setting the brightness 75
GPS navigation, refer to Navi sions 266 Ignition 54
gation system 138 High-beam Assistant 82 Ignition key position 1, refer to
Gross vehicle weight, refer to High beams 82 Radio ready state 54
Weights 267 High beams Ignition key position 2, refer to
Bulb replacement 247 Ignition on 54
High beams/low beams, auto
H Ignition key, refer to Remote
matic, refer to High-beam control with integrated
Halogen headlamps Assistant 82 key 30
Bulb replacement 247 High beams, indicator Ignition lock 54
Hand-held transmitter, alter lamp 15 Ignition, switched off 55
nating code 111 High-pressure washers 259 Ignition, switched on 54
Hands-free microphone 16 Hill Descent Control HDC 96 Indication of a flat tire 89, 91
Hazard warning sys Hill drive-off assistant, refer to Indicator and warning
tem 16, 253 Drive-off assistant 97 lamps 15
281
Inflation pressure monitor, re Intersection, entering for navi Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 88 gation 141 Safety belts 45
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire iPod/iPhone 182 Lashing eyes, securing
inflation pressure 228 cargo 131
Information on the navigation J LATCH child restraint fixing
data 138 system 51
Initialization after power fail Jacking points for the vehicle Leather, care 260
ure 251 jack 251 LEDs, light-emitting di
Initializing Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 251 odes 246
Compass, refer to Calibrat Joystick, refer to Selector Length, refer to Dimen
ing 113 lever 65 sions 266
Panoramic glass sunroof 42 Jump-starting 255 Letters and numbers, enter
Refer to Setting the time and ing 23
date 73
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
K License plate lamp, bulb re
placement 250
FTM 88
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Light-alloy wheels, care 261
Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon
Access 36 Light-emitting diodes,
itor TPM 91
Keyless opening and closing, LEDs 246
Inside brake lamps
refer to Comfort Access 36 Lighter 114
Bulb replacement 250
Key Memory, refer to Personal Lighting
Installation location, tele
Profile 30 Instruments 83
phone 120
Key, refer to Integrated key/re Lamp and bulb replace
Instrument cluster 14 ment 246
mote control 30
Instrument lighting 83 Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Kickdown
Instrument panel, refer to In Lamps 80
strument cluster 14 Light switch 80
Steptronic 63, 64
Instruments, refer to Cock Knee airbag 85 Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
pit 12 Knocking control 226 Load 130
Integrated key 30 Loading 130
Interactive map 145
Interior equipment 110
L Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 35
Interior lamps 84 Label, run-flat tire 236 Locking
Interior lamps From the inside 35
Lamp and bulb replacement,
Remote control 32 From the outside 32
lamp replacement 246
Interior mirror 49 Setting the confirmation sig
Lamps 80
Interior rearview mirror, auto nals 33
Lamps, automatic headlamp
matic dimming 49 Without remote control, refer
control 80, 81
Interior rearview mirror, com to Comfort Access 36
Lamps, High-beam Assis Locking the vehicle
pass 112
tant 82 From the inside 34
Interior temperature, setting
Automatic climate con Lamps, parking lamps/low From the outside 32
trol 105 beams 80 Locks, doors, and win
Interlock, refer to Disengaging Lamps, replacing, refer to dows 53
the remote control 62 Lamp and bulb replace Longlife oils, alternative oil
Intermediate destinations 147 ment 246 types 241
Internet page 6 Language, changing on the Longlife oils, refer to Approved
Control Display 74 engine oils 241
282
Low beams 80 Map display in black and Mounting of child restraint fix
Low beams white 154 ing systems 50
Automatic 81 Map in split screen 153 MP3 player 181
Bulb replacement 247 Map view 151 Multimedia 170
Low beams, automatic 80 Marking on approved Music collection 176
Low beams, automatic, refer to tires 236 Music search 178
High-beam Assistant 82 Master key, refer to Remote Music, storing 176
Lower back support, refer to control with integrated
Lumbar support 44 key 30 N
Luggage rack Maximum cooling 106
Rear luggage rack 132 Maximum speed, winter Navigation 138
Luggage rack, refer to Roof- tires 236 Navigation data 138
mounted luggage rack 132 Medical kit, refer to First aid Navigation data, updating 138
Lumbar support 44 kit 254 Navigation system
Memory, refer to Seat and mir Destination entry by
M ror memory 47 voice 146
Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Neck restraints, refer to Head
Main inspection, refer to Serv Menus, refer to iDrive operat restraints 46
ice requirements 75 ing concept 19 Nets, refer to Storage com
Maintenance 243 Message list, traffic bulle partments 121
Maintenance, refer to Service tins 153 New wheels and tires 235
booklet Messages 207 Notes 6, 210
Maintenance, refer to Service Microfilter Nozzles, refer to Ventila
requirements 75 With automatic climate con tion 108
Maintenance require trol 108
ments 243 Minimum tread, tires 234 O
Maintenance system Mirror
BMW 243 Mirror memory, refer to Seat OBD Onboard Diagnos
Malfunction and mirror memory 47 tics 244
Automatic transmission with Mirrors 48 OBD socket, refer to Socket
Steptronic 64 Mirrors for OBD Onboard Diagno
Door lock 34 Automatic Curb Monitor 48 sis 244
Fuel filler flap 225 Mirrors, folding in and out 48 Octane number, refer to Fuel
Tailgate 36 Mirrors, heating 49 quality 226
Malfunction warnings, refer to Mirrors, interior mirror 49 Octane rating, refer to Gaso
Check Control 77 Mobile communication devi line quality 226
Manual air distribution 106 ces in the vehicle 127 Odometer 68
Manual mode, automatic Mobile phone, installation lo Office 204
transmission with Step cation, refer to Center arm Oil additives 241
tronic 63, 66 rest 120
Manual operation Oil consumption 239
Mobile phone, refer to Tele Oil level 239
Door lock 34 phone 192
Driver's door 34 Oil, refer to Engine oil 239
Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, alternative 241
Selector lever lock, auto
to Safety 6 Oil types, approved 241
matic transmission 64
Monitor, refer to Control Dis Old batteries, disposal 251
Manual operation, fuel filler
play 18 Onboard Diagnostics
flap 225
Map, destination entry 145 OBD 244
283
Onboard monitor, refer to Passenger side mirror, tilt R

Control Display 18 ing 48
Onboard vehicle tool kit 245 PDC Park Distance Con Radiator fluid, refer to Cool
Opening and closing trol 100 ant 242
Comfort Access 36 Performance Control 96 Radio-operated key, refer to
From the inside 34 Personal information 204 Remote control with
From the outside 32 Personal Profile 30 integrated key 30
Using the door lock 34 Pinch protection Radio ready state 54
Using the remote control 32 Panoramic glass sunroof 42 Radio ready state, switched
Operating concept, iDrive 18 Windows 40 off 55
Outside-air mode Plastic, care 261 Radio ready state, switched
Automatic climate con PlugIn 220
trol 107 on 54
Pollen Radio setting, refer to Radio
Outside air, refer to Recircu Refer to Microfilter/acti
lated air mode 107 ready state 54
vated-charcoal filter with au
Overheating of engine, refer to Rain sensor 60
tomatic climate control 108
Coolant temperature 69 Random 171
Poor road operation 128
Random playback 171
Position, storing 142
Range 70
P Postal code, entering in navi
RDS 163
gation 141
Paint, vehicle 260 Reading lamps 84
Power windows
Pairing, mobile phone 193 Safety switch 41 Reading out loud 211
Panic mode 33 Power windows, opening and Rear lamps, refer to Tail
Panoramic glass sunroof closing 40 lamps 249
Convenient operation 32 Power windows, refer to Win Rear seat backrest
Initializing 42 Foldable 115
dows 40
Opening, closing 41 Rear seats
Prescribed engine oils, refer to
Pinch protection 42 Adjusting the backrest
Approved engine oils 241 tilt 115
Power failure 42
Pressure, tires 228 Adjusting the head re
Remote control 32
Pressure warning, tires 88 straints 47
Tilting 41
Profile depth, refer to Mini Folding down 115
Park Distance Control
mum tread depth 234 Folding down the back
PDC 100
Profile, tires 234 rests 115
Parked-car ventilation 108
Programmable memory but Rear socket 114
Parked vehicle, condensa
tons, iDrive 23 Rearview mirror, refer to Mir
tion 128
Protection function, refer to rors 48
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis
Pinch protection Rear window defroster 107
tance Control PDC 100
Panoramic glass sunroof 42 Rear window, washing 61
Parking assistant, refer to Park Protective function, refer to Rear window wiper 61
Distance Control PDC 100 Pinch protection Recirculated air mode 107
Parking brake, refer to Hand Windows 40 Recommended tire
brake 58 Push-and-turn switch, refer to brands 236
Parking lamps 80 Controller 19 Redialing 199
Parking lamps/low beams 80
Refueling 224
Parking lamps, bulb replace
Remaining distance to desti
ment 248
nation, refer to Computer 70
Passenger airbags, deactivat
ing 86
284
Remaining range for service, RON, refer to Fuel quality 226 Seat adjustment
refer to Service require Roof load capacity 267 Manual 43
ments 75 Roof-mounted luggage Seat adjustment, electric 44
Remaining range, refer to rack 132 Seat and mirror memory 47
Range 70 Rope, refer to Towing 257 Seat belts
Reminders 211 Route 150 Refer to Safety belts 45
Remote control Route criteria, route 149 Seat heating 45
Battery replacement 38 Route, displaying 150 Seats
Comfort Access 36 Adjusting 43
Route section, bypassing 150
Garage door opener 110 Adjusting electrically 44
RSC Runflat System Compo
Malfunction 33, 38 Heating 45
nent, refer to Run-flat Memory, refer to Seat and
Tailgate 33
tires 236 mirror memory 47
Universal 110
Rubber components, Sitting safely 43
Remote control, removing
care 261 Storing the setting, refer to
from the ignition lock 54
Run-flat tires 236 Seat and mirror memory 47
Remote control, service
Run-flat tires, tire inflation Selector lever, automatic
data 243
pressure 228 transmission with Step
Remote inquiry 198
Running lights, refer to Parking tronic 62, 65
Replacement fuse 252
lamps/low beams 80 Selector lever lock, overrid
Replacement remote con
ing 64
trol 30
Replacing wheels/tires 235 S Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever po
Reporting safety defects 8
Safe braking 127 sitions, Shiftlock 62
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
Safety 6 Selector lever lock, releas
gauge 69
Safety belts 45 ing 65
Reservoir for washer fluid, re
Safety belts Selector lever positions, auto
fer to Washer fluid reser
Damage 46 matic transmission with
voir 62 Safety belts, care 261 Steptronic 62
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon Safety belts, indicator/warning Sensors, care 261
itor TPM 91 lamp 46 Service and warranty 7
Restraining systems
Safety belts, reminder 46 Service data in the remote
Refer to Safety belts 45
Safety switch for rear win control 243
Restraint systems for chil
dows 41 Service interval display, refer
dren 50
Safety systems to Condition Based Service
Retaining straps, securing
Safety belts 45 CBS 243
cargo 131 Safety systems, airbags 85
Retreaded tires 236 Service interval display, refer
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat to Service requirements 75
Reverse gear
tires 236 Service requirements 75
Satellite radio 164 Service requirements, CBS
Steptronic 63
Saving fuel 133 Condition Based Serv
Road, avoiding 149
Scale, changing during navi ice 243
Road detour 149
gation 152 Service, Roadside Assis
Roadside Assistance 216
Roadside parking lamp Screen, refer to Control Dis tance 254
Bulb replacement 248 play 18 Servotronic 97
Roadside parking lamps 82 Search, refer to BMW On
RON gasoline quality 226 line 217
285
Settings Software update 188 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

Changing on the Control Dis SOS, refer to Emergency Re transmission with Step
play 74 quest, initiating 253 tronic 62
Language 74 Sound output 162, 170 Steptronic, refer to Sport pro
Settings and information 71 Spare fuse 252 gram and manual mode M/
Settings, configuring, refer to Special destinations, naviga S 66
Personal Profile 30 tion 143 Stopping, engine 55
Settings, DVD 173 Special equipment, series Storage compartment
Setting the clock, 12h/24h for equipment 6 nets 121
mat 73 Speed, average 70 Storage compart
Shifting Speed limit 78 ments 120, 121
Speed limit, setting 79 Storage, tires 236
Steptronic 63
Speedometer 14 Storing the seat position, refer
Shifting, automatic transmis
Speed, with winter tires 236 to Seat and mirror mem
sion with Steptronic 66
Split screen 22 ory 47
Shift lever
Automatic transmission with Split screen map settings 153 Storing the vehicle 262
Steptronic 62 Spoken instructions, naviga Street, entering for naviga
Shift paddles 66 tion 151 tion 141
Shift paddles on the steering Sport program, automatic Summer tires, refer to Wheels
wheel 64 transmission with Step and tires 228
Short commands, voice acti tronic 63, 66 Summer tires, tread 234
vation 268 Spray nozzles, refer to Clean Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Side airbags 85 ing the windshield and head Switching off, engine 55
Side windows, refer to Win lamps 60 Switching off, vehicle 55
dows 40 Spray nozzles, refer to Wind Switch-on times, parked-car
Size, refer to Dimensions 266 shield washer nozzles 61 ventilation 109
Ski bag, refer to Ski and snow Stability control systems 94 Symbols 6
board bag 119 Start/Stop button 54
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to Start/Stop button, starting the T
Panoramic glass sunroof 41 engine 55
Slot for remote control 54 Start/Stop button, switching Tachometer 69
Smokers' package, refer to off the engine 55 Tailgate
Ashtray 114 Starting the engine 55 Comfort Access 37
Start problems, refer to Jump- Emergency operation, refer
Snap-in adapter, mobile
starting 255 to Opening manually 36
phone 202
State/province, selecting for Opening from the inside 35
Snap-in adapter, refer to Stor Opening from the out
age compartment of center navigation 140
side 36
armrest 120 Stations, stored 168
Opening manually 36
Snow chains 237 Station, storing 162 Remote control 33
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag Status information, iDrive 22 Tail lamp, bulb replace
nosis 244 Status of Owner's Manual 6 ment 250
Socket, refer to Connecting Steam jets 259 Tail lamps 249
electrical devices 114 Steering wheel 49 Tail lamps
Software applications, Steering wheel Bulb replacement 249, 250
iPhone 219 Shift paddles 64 Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
Steering wheel, adjusting 49 gauge 69
Software part number 192
Steering wheel lock 54
286
Tasks 210 Tires Transmission positions, auto

Technical changes, refer to Inflation pressure 228 matic transmission with
Safety 6 Tires, breaking in 126 Steptronic 64
Technical data 266 Tires, changing 235 Transporting children
Telephone 192 Tires, condition 234 safely 50
Telephone, adjusting the vol Tires, damage 235 Treble, tone 160
ume 196 Tire size 233 Trip computer, refer to Dis
Telephone, installation loca Tires, minimum tread 234 plays on the Control Dis
tion, refer to Center arm Tires, retreaded tires 236 play 70
rest 120 Tires, run-flat tires 236 Trip-distance counter, refer to
TeleService 216 Tires, storage 236 Trip odometer 68
Temperature Tire tread 234 Triple turn signal activa
Automatic climate con Toll roads, route 149 tion 59
trol 106 Tone 160 Trip odometer 68
Changing the unit of meas Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve Trips, planning 147
ure 72 hicle tool kit 245 Trunk, refer to Cargo
Temperature, coolant, refer to Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle area 115
Coolant temperature 69 tool kit 245 Turning circle, refer to Dimen
Temperature display Tow bar 257 sions 266
External temperature 68 Tow fitting 258 Turning lamps, refer to Adap
External temperature warn
Towing 256 tive light control 81
ing 68
Towing another vehicle 256 Turn signal
Setting the unit 72
Towing, being towed 256 Indicator/warning lamp 14
Temperature, engine oil 69
Towing with automatic trans Turn signals 59
Temperature warning 68
mission 256 Turn signals
Text messages 207
Town/city, navigation 141 Bulb replacement 249
Theft alarm system, refer to
Tow rope 257 Bulb replacement, front 249
Alarm system 38 Turn signals, triple turn signal
Tow-starting 256, 258
Thigh support adjustment 44 activation 59
TPM Tire Pressure Moni
Third brake lamp, refer to Cen
tor 90
ter brake lamp 250
Tilting the passenger side mir
Traction control 95 U
Traffic bulletins, naviga
ror 48 Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
Time tion 153
Transmission UTQG 233
Setting the time 72
Automatic transmission with Unintentional alarms, avoid
Setting the time zone 73
Steptronic 62 ing 39
Tire age 233
Overriding selector lever lock Units
Tire identification marks 233
in case of automatic trans Average fuel consump
Tire inflation pressure 228
mission with Steptronic 64 tion 72
Tire inflation pressure, check Transmission, automatic Temperature 72
ing 228 transmission with Step Units of measure, changing on
Tire pressure monitor, refer to tronic 64 Control Display 72
Flat Tire Monitor 88 Transmission lock Universal Garage Door
Tire Pressure Monitor Refer to Changing selector Opener 110
TPM 90 lever positions 62 Universal remote control 110
Tire Quality Grading 233 Refer to P Park 63
287
Unlocking Voice activation Windows

From the outside 32 Navigation 146 Safety switch 41
Setting the unlocking char Voice activation, mobile Windows, defrosting and de
acteristics 32 phone 200 fogging
Tailgate 37 Voice activation, short com Automatic climate con
Without remote control, refer mands 268 trol 107
to Comfort Access 36 Voice activation system 25 Windows, pinch protection 40
Unlocking, from the inside 35 Volume, setting 160 Windshield, cleaning 60
Unlocking, hood 238 Windshield, defrosting, refer
Updates made after the edito to Defrosting windows 107
rial deadline 6
W
Windshield wash 59
Update, software 188 Warning and indicator Windshield washer fluid 61
Upholstery care 260 lamps 15 Windshield wash, rear win
USB audio interface 182 Warning messages, refer to dow 61
Check Control 77 Windshield wash, reservoir for
V Warning signal volumes 161 washer fluid 62
Warning triangle 254 Windshield wash, washer
Vacuum cleaner, connecting, Washer/wiper system 59 fluid 62
refer to Connecting electrical Washer/wiper system, rain Windshield wash, washer noz
devices 114 sensor 60 zles 61
Vehicle Windshield wiper blades,
Washer/wiper system, washer
Identification number 192 changing 245
fluid 61
Vehicle battery, changing 251 Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system, wind
Vehicle, breaking in 126 Washer/wiper system 59
shield washer nozzles 61
Vehicle care 260 Winter storage, care 262
Washer fluid 61
Vehicle care, refer to Winter tires, setting the speed
Washer fluid reservoir 62
Care 259 limit 79
Washing, vehicle 259
Vehicle equipment 6 Winter tires, suitable tires 236
Waste tray, refer to Ash
Vehicle identification number, Winter tires, tread 234
tray 114
refer to Identification number Wiper blades, changing 245
Water on roads, refer to Driving
in the engine compart Wiper fluid 61
through water 127
ment 238 Wood, care 261
Weights 267
Vehicle jack 251 Word match concept, naviga
Welcome lamps 80
Vehicle paint 260 tion 24
Wheelbase, refer to Dimen
Vehicle storage 262 Working in the engine com
sions 266
Vehicle, switching off 55 partment 238
Wheel change 250
Vehicle wash 259 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Wheels and tires 228
Ventilation Onboard vehicle tool kit 245
Draft-free 108 Wheels, changing 235
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
ventilation 108 FTM 88 X
Version of the navigation Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90 xDrive 96
data 138 Xenon headlamps
Video playback 172 Width, refer to Dimen
Bulb replacement 248
Video playback, iPhone 184 sions 266
Video playback, snap-in Window, convenient opera
adapter 184 tion 32
288
Y
Your individual vehicle
Settings, refer to Personal
Profile 30
289
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
01 40 2 914 595 ue
*BL2914595007*

X1 With IDrive As of 7 12

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

X1 With IDrive As of 7 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual for

A-Z The Ultimate Driving

THE BMW X1.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

Symbols Status of this Owner's Manual

Symbols on vehicle components

ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri California Proposition 65 Warning

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

All around the steering wheel

1 Safety switch for rear power win Automatic headlamp con

5 Steering column stalk, left

High beams, head

High-beam Assistant82 Change the radio station

Computer70 Next entertainment source

Settings and information about Recirculated air mode107

Activate/deactivate the voice acti

14 Horn, the entire surface

1 Speedometer Hill Descent Control96

Engine oil temperature69 Odometer and trip odometer68

5 Display for Checking engine oil level239

Clock68 Settings and information71

External temperature68 Check Control message

Indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system

Front fog lamps, refer to page 83

The handbrake is set, refer to

Several of the lamps are checked for proper

Canada: engine malfunction with ad

Supplementary text messages

Indicator lamps without text messages

Turn signals, refer to page 59

High beams/headlamp flasher, refer

All around the center console

1 Headliner17 8 PDC Park Distance Control100

Deactivate the Automatic Engine

DSC Dynamic Stability Con

9 Selector lever with automatic transmis

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request253 4 Reading lamps84

2 Panoramic glass sunroof41 5 Interior lamps84

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas

Controller Press the button Function

TEL Opens the Telephone

BACK Displays the previous

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

3. Move in four directions.

The main menu is displayed.

Press the button Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

Selecting menu items

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate

View of an opened menu

Additional options: move the controller to the

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

Check the SIM card.